2007 Honda Pilot Online Reference Owner's Manual
Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.
For a printed owner's manual, click on authorized manuals or go to www.helminc.com.
Contents
Owner's Identification Form
Introduction .........................................................................................................................................i
A Few Words About Safe
ty................................................................................................................iii
Your Vehicle at a Glance.....................................................................................................................4
Driver and Passenger Safety ..............................................................................................................7
Proper use and care of your vehicle's seat belts, and Supplemental Restraint System.
Instruments and Controls.................................................................................................................59
Instrument panel indicator and gauge, and how to use dashboard and steering column controls.
Comfort and Convenience Features ..............................................................................................105
How to operate the climate control system, the audio system, and other convenience features.
Before Driving..................................................................................................................................185
What gasoline to use, how to break-in your new vehicle, and how to load luggage and other cargo.
Driving ..............................................................................................................................................197
The proper way to start the engine, shift the transmission, and park, plus towing a trailer.
Maintenance.....................................................................................................................................227
The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your vehicle to the dealer.
Taking Care of the Unexpected......................................................................................................265
This section covers several problems motorists sometimes experience, and how to handle them.
Technical Information.....................................................................................................................285
ID numbers, dimensions, capacities, and technical information.
Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada)................................................................301
A summary of the warranties covering your new Acura, and how to contact us.
Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)......................................................................................................305
How to order manuals and other technical literature.
Index...................................................................................................................................................... I
Service Information Summary
A summary of information you need when you pull up to the fuel pump.
Accord Value Package Audio System
This owner’s manual should be considered
a permanent part of the vehicle and should
remain with the vehicle when it is sold.
This owner’s manual covers all models of
the Pilot. You may find descriptions of
equipment and features that are not on your
particular model.
The information and specifications included
in this publication were in effect at the time
of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co.,
Ltd. reserves the right, however, to
discontinue or change specifications or
design at any time without notice and
without incurring any obligation whatsoever.
Owner’s Identification
POUR CLIENTS CANADIEN
AVIS IMPORTANT: Si vous avez
besoin d’un Manuel du Conducteur
en français, veuillez demander à
votreconcessionnairede
commander le numéro de pièce
33S9VC40
OWNER
ADDRESS
V. I. N.
DELIVERY DATE
DEALER NAME DEALER NO.
ADDRESS
OWNER’S SIGNATURE
DEALER’S SIGNATURE
STREET
CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/
POSTAL CODE
(Date sold to original retail purchaser)
STREET
CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/
POSTAL CODE
Main Menu
Several warranties protect your new vehicle. Read the warranty booklet
thoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rights
and responsibilities.
As you read this manual, you will
find information that is preceded by
a symbol. This
information is intended to help you
avoid damage to your vehicle, other
property, or the environment.
One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new vehicle is to
read this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls and
convenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle so
youcanrefertoitatanytime.
Congratulations! Your selection of a 2007 Honda Pilot was a wise investment.
It will give you years of driving pleasure.
Maintaining your vehicle according to the schedules given in this manual
helps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves your investment.
When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind that your dealer’s staff
is specially trained in servicing the many systems unique to your vehicle.
Your dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will be pleased to answer
any questions and concerns.
Introduction
i
Main Menu
California Proposition 65 Warning
This product contains or emits chemicals known to the state of California to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm.
Service Diagnostic Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record information about powertrain performance. The data
can be used to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians diagnose and solve service problems. It may
also be combined with data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains confidential and is never linked to
the vehicle owner.
Event Data Recorders
This vehicle is equipped with one or more devices commonly referred to as event data recorders. These devices
record front seat belt use, front passenger seat occupancy, airbag deployment data, and the failure of any airbag
system component. This data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by anyone else except as legally
required or with the permission of the vehicle owner.
Introduction
WARNING:
ii
California Perchlorate Contamination Prevention Act
The airbags, seat belt tensioners, and CR type batteries in this vehicle contain perclorate materials - special handling may
apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Main Menu
−
−
−
−
−
−
To help you make informed
decisions about safety, we have
provided operating procedures and
other information on labels and in
this manual. This information alerts
you to potential hazards that could
hurt you or others.
Of course, it is not practical or
possible to warn you about all the
hazards associated with operating or
maintaining your vehicle. You must
use your own good judgement.
You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,
including:
This entire book is filled with important safety information please read it
carefully.
how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
such as Driver and Passenger Safety.
such as Important Safety Reminders or Important
Safety Precautions.
These signal words mean:
preceded by a safety alert symbol and one of
three signal words: , , or .
on the vehicle.
Your safety, and the safety of others,
is very important. And operating this
vehicle safely is an important
responsibility.
Instructions
Safety Section
Safety Headings
Safety Messages
Safety Labels
AFewWordsAboutSafety
DANGER WARNING CAUTION
iii
You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow
instructions.
You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
Main Menu
These advantages come at some cost. Because your vehicle is taller and rides higher off the ground, it has a high
center of gravity. This means your vehicle can tip or roll over if you make abrupt turns. Utility vehicles have a
significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly
more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. As a reminder, make sure you and your passengers always wear
seat belts.
For information on how to reduce the risk of rollover, read ‘‘Driving Guidelines’’ on page of this manual and the
section on page . Failure to operate your vehicle correctly might result in loss of
control or an accident.
Your Pilot has higher ground clearance than a passenger vehicle designed for use only on pavement. Higher ground
clearance has many advantages for off-highway driving. It allows you to travel over bumps, obstacles, and rough
terrain. It also provides good visibility so you can anticipate problems earlier.
198
222
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines
Important Handling Information
iv
Main Menu
＊
＊
If equipped.:
Your Vehicle at a Glance
4
GAUGES
MIRROR
CONTROLS
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES
HOOD RELEASE
HANDLE
PARKING BRAKE
PEDAL
REAR A/C CONTROL
DRIVER’S FRONT
AIRBAG
(P. 11, 28)
REAR VIEW MIRROR WITH
COMPASS
(P. 70)
(P. 82)
(P. 93)
(P. 94)
(P. 188)
(P. 187) (P. 97)
(P. 113)
(P. 177)
Vehicle with rear entertainment system is shown.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
INDICATORS
(P. 61)
FUEL FILL DOOR
RELEASE HANDLE
SHIFT LEVER
(P. 200)
ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET
(P. 101)
HEATING/COOLING
SYSTEM
CLIMATE CONTROL
SYSTEM
AUDIO SYSTEM
(P. 115)
PASSENGER’S
FRONT AIRBAG
(P. 106)
GLOVE BOX
(P. 99)
POWER DOOR LOCK
SWITCH
(P. 11, 35)
Main Menu
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
If equipped.
To use the horn, press the pad around the ‘‘H’’ logo.
1:
:
Your Vehicle at a Glance
Your Vehicle at a Glance
5
LIGHT CONTROL
SWITCH
STEERING WHEEL
ADJUSTMENT
WINDSHIELD WIPERS/
WASHERS
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER
PASSENGER AIRBAG
OFF INDICATOR
(P. 96)
(P. 102)
(P. 75)
MOONROOF BUTTONS
(P. 204)
VTM-4 LOCK
(P. 35)
(P. 77)
(P. 74)
REMOTE AUDIO
CONTROLS
(P. 138) (P. 78)
(P. 175)
CRUISE CONTROL
BUTTONS
VSA OFF SWITCH
(P. 212)
CRUISE CONTROL
MASTER BUTTON
(P. 175)
HAZARD WARNING BUTTON
(P. 77)
HORN
HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNAL/FOG LIGHTS
1
1
1
1
Main Menu
Main Menu
−
This section gives you important
information about how to protect
yourself and your passengers. It
shows you how to use seat belts. It
explains how your airbags work. And
it tells you how to properly restrain
infants and children in your vehicle.
.........Important Safety Precautions . 8
.......Your Vehicle’s Safety Features . 9
.....................................Seat Belts . 10
.........................................Airbags . 11
.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 12
.....1. Close and Lock the Doors . 13
...........2. Adjust the Front Seats . 13
............3. Adjust the Seat-Backs . 14
...4. Adjust the Head Restraints . 15
5. Fasten and Position the Seat
.....................................Belts . 15
6. Maintain a Proper Sitting
................................Position . 18
.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 19
...Additional Safety Precautions . 20
Additional Information About Your
.................................Seat Belts . 21
..Seat Belt System Components . 21
......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 22
Automatic Seat Belt
...............................Tensioners . 23
...............Seat Belt Maintenance . 23
Additional Information About
..........................Your Airbags . 25
......Airbag System Components . 25
How Your Front Airbags
....................................Work . 28
......................Advanced Airbags . 30
...How Your Side Airbags Work . 31
How Your Side Curtain Airbags
.........................................Work . 33
..How the SRS Indicator Works . 33
How the Side Airbag Off
......................Indicator Works . 34
How the Passenger Airbag Off
......................Indicator Works . 35
.............................Airbag Service . 36
...Additional Safety Precautions . 37
Protecting Children General
................................Guidelines . 38
All Children Must Be
...............................Restrained . 38
All Children Should Sit in a
.................................Back Seat . 39
The Passenger’s Front Airbag
.........Can Pose Serious Risks . 39
If You Must Drive with Several
...................................Children . 41
If a Child Requires Close
..................................Attention . 41
...Additional Safety Precautions . 42
Protecting Infants and Small
...................................Children . 43
.......................Protecting Infants . 43
.........Protecting Small Children . 44
.....................Selecting a Child Seat . 45
....................Installing a Child Seat . 46
...............................With LATCH . 47
.........With a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 49
..............................With a Tether . 51
...........Protecting Larger Children . 53
...............Checking Seat Belt Fit . 53
..................Using a Booster Seat . 54
When Can a Larger Child Sit in
.........................................Front . 55
...Additional Safety Precautions . 56
.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 57
...................................Safety Labels . 58
Driver and Passenger Safety
Driver and Passenger Safety
7
Main Menu
−You’ll find many safety
recommendations throughout this
section, and throughout this manual.
Therecommendationsonthispage
are the ones we consider to be the
most important.
Excessive speed is a major factor in
crash injuries and deaths. Generally,
the higher the speed, the greater the
risk, but serious injuries can also
occur at lower speeds. Never drive
faster than is safe for current
conditions, regardless of the
maximum speed posted.
Having a tire blowout or a
mechanical failure can be extremely
hazardous. To reduce the possibility
of such problems, check your tire
pressures and condition frequently,
and perform all regularly scheduled
maintenance (see page ).Children age 12 and under should
ride properly restrained in a back
seat, not the front seat. Infants and
smallchildrenshouldberestrained
in a child seat. Larger children
should use a booster seat and a lap/
shoulder belt until they can use the
belt properly without a booster seat
(see pages ).
Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Even
one drink can reduce your ability to
respond to changing conditions, and
your reaction time gets worse with
every additional drink. So don’t drink
and drive, and don’t let your friends
drink and drive, either.
While airbags can save lives, they
can cause serious or fatal injuries to
occupants who sit too close to them,
or are not properly restrained.
Infants, young children, and short
adults are at the greatest risk. Be
sure to follow all instructions and
warnings in this manual.
A seat belt is your best protection in
all types of collisions. Airbags are
designed to supplement seat belts,
not replace them. So even though
your vehicle is equipped with airbags,
make sure you and your passengers
always wear your seat belts, and
wear them properly (see page ).15
5638
229
Important Safety Precautions
Always Wear Your Seat Belt
Control Your Speed
Keep Your Vehicle in Safe
Condition
Restrain All Children
Don’t Drink and Drive
Be Aware of Airbag Hazards
8
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your vehicle is equipped with many
features that work together to
protect you and your passengers
during a crash.
Some features do not require any
action on your part. These include a
strong steel framework that forms a
safety cage around the passenger
compartment, front and rear crush
zones, a collapsible steering column,
and tensioners that tighten the front
seat belts in a crash.
However, you and your passengers
can’t take full advantage of these
features unless you remain sitting in
a proper position and
. In fact, some safety
features can contribute to injuries if
they are not used properly.
The following pages explain how you
cantakeanactiveroleinprotecting
yourself and your passenger.
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
always wear
your seat belts
Driver and Passenger Safety
9
(7)
(10)
(9) (3) (1) (4)
(2)
(6)(10)
(7) (8)
(5)
(2)
(11)
(1) Safety Cage
(2) Crush Zones
(3) Seats and Seat-Backs
(4) Head Restraints
(5) Collapsible Steering Column
(6) Seat Belts
(7) Front Airbags
(8) Front Seat Belt Tensioners
(9) Door Locks
(10) Side Airbags
(11) Side Curtain Airbags
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your vehicle is equipped with seat
belts in all seating positions.
Keep you connected to the vehicle
so you can take advantage of the
vehicle’s built-in safety features.
When properly worn, seat belts:
Help keep you from being thrown
against the inside of the vehicle
and against other occupants.
Keep you from being thrown out
of the vehicle.
Help keep you in a good position
should the airbags ever deploy. A
good position reduces the risk of
injury from an inflating airbag and
allows you to get the best
advantage from the airbag.
Of course, seat belts cannot
completely protect you in every
crash.Butinmostcases,seatbelts
can reduce your risk of serious
injury.
Your seat belt system also includes
an indicator on the instrument panel
and a beeper to remind you and your
passengers to fasten your seat belts.
Seat belts are the single most
effectivesafetydeviceforadultsand
larger children. (Infants and smaller
children must be properly restrained
in child seats.)
Not wearing a seat belt properly
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash, even
though your vehicle has airbags.
In addition, most states and all
Canadian provinces require you to
wear seat belts.
Always wear
your seat belt, and make sure you
wear it properly.
Help protect you in almost every
type of crash, including frontal,
side, and rear impacts and
rollovers.
Seat Belts
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Why Wear Seat Belts
What you should do:
10
Not wearing a seat belt properly
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash, even
though your vehicle has airbags.
Be sure you and your
passengers always wear seat
belts and wear them properly.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your vehicle also has side airbags to
help protect the upper torso of the
driver or a front seat passenger
during a moderate to severe side
impact (see page for more
information on how your side airbags
work).
Your vehicle has a supplemental
restraint system (SRS) with front
airbags to help protect the heads and
chests of the driver and a front seat
passenger during a moderate to
severe frontal collision (see page
for more information on how
your front airbags work).
In addition, your vehicle has side
curtain airbags to help protect the
heads of the driver, front passenger,
and passengers in the outer rear
seating positions during a moderate
to severe side impact or rollover (see
page for more information on how
your side curtain airbags work).
28
31
33
CONTINUED
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
11
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−See pages for important
guidelines on how to properly
protect infants, small children, and
larger children who ride in your
vehicle.
The most important things you need
to know about your airbags are:
They are designed to supplement
the seat belts.
Remember however, that no safety
system can prevent all injures or
deaths that can occur in a severe
crash, even when seat belts are
properly worn and the airbags deploy.
The rest of this section gives more
detailed information about how you
can maximize your safety.
Always wear
your seat belt properly, and sit
upright and as far back from the
steering wheel as possible while
allowing full control of the vehicle. A
front passenger should move their
seat as far back from the dashboard
as possible.
To do their job, airbags must
inflate with tremendous force. So
while airbags help save lives, they
can cause minor injuries or more
serious or even fatal injuries if
occupants are not properly
restrained or sitting properly.
The following pages provide
instructions on how to properly
protect the driver, adult passengers,
and teenage children who are large
enough and mature enough to drive
or ride in the front seat.
38 56
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features, Protecting Adults and Teens
Protecting Adults and Teens
Introduction
Airbags do not replace seat belts.
What you should do:
Airbags can pose serious hazards.
Airbags offer no protection in rear
impacts, or minor frontal or side
collisions.
12
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you cannot get far enough away
from the steering wheel and still
reach the controls, we recommend
that you investigate whether some
type of adaptive equipment may help.
Your vehicle has a door and
tailgate monitor indicator
on the instrument panel to indicate
when a specific door or the tailgate is
not tightly closed.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that drivers
allow at least 10 inches (25 cm)
between the center of the steering
wheel and the chest. In addition to
adjusting the seat, you can adjust the
steering wheel up and down (see
page ).
After everyone has entered the
vehicle, be sure the doors and the
tailgate are closed and locked.
Locking the doors reduces the
chance of someone being thrown out
of the vehicle during a crash, and it
helps prevent passengers from
accidentally opening a door and
falling out.
Locking the doors also helps prevent
an outsider from unexpectedly
opening a door when you come to a
stop.
See page for how to lock the
doors, and page for how the door
and tailgate open monitor works.
Adjust the driver’s seat as far to the
rear as possible while allowing you to
maintain full control of the vehicle.
Have a front passenger adjust their
seat as far to the rear as possible.
If you sit too close to the steering
wheel or dashboard, you can be
seriously injured by an inflating front
airbag, or by striking the steering
wheel or dashboard.
78
66
82
CONTINUED
Protecting Adults and Teens
Adjust the Front SeatsClose and Lock the Doors 2.1.
Driver and Passenger Safety
13
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Reclining a seat-back so that the
shoulder part of the belt no longer
rests against the occupant’s chest
reduces the protective capability of
the belt. It also increases the chance
of sliding under the belt in a crash
and being seriously injured. The
farther a seat-back is reclined, the
greater the risk of injury.
See page for how to adjust the
seat-backs.
Passengers with adjustable seat-
backs should also adjust their seat-
back to a comfortable, upright
position.
Adjust the driver’s seat-back to a
comfortable, upright position,
leaving ample space between your
chest and the airbag cover in the
center of the steering wheel.
Once your seat is adjusted correctly,
rock it back and forth to make sure it
is locked in position.
See page for how to adjust the
seats.
87
87
Protecting Adults and Teens
Adjust the Seat-Backs3.
14
Reclining the seat-back too far
can result in serious injury or
death in a crash.
Adjust the seat-back to an
upright position, and sit well
back in the seat.
Sitting too close to a front
airbag can result in serious
injury or death if the front
airbags inflate.
Always sit as far back from the
front airbags as possible.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Properly adjusted head restraints
will help protect occupants from
whiplash and other crash injuries.
See page for how to adjust the
head restraints.
Insert the latch plate into the buckle,
then tug on the belt to make sure the
belt is securely latched. Check that
the belt is not twisted, because a
twisted belt can cause serious
injuries in a crash.
Adjust the driver’s head restraint so
the back of your head rests against
the center of the restraint.
Have passengers with adjustable
head restraints adjust their restraints
properly as well. Taller persons
should adjust their restraint as high
as possible.
The center seating position in the
second row and all third row seats
have a detachable seat belt that can
be unlatched and retracted into the
ceiling to allow the seats to be folded
down. See page for how to
unlatch and relatch a belt.
Detachable seat belts should
normally be latched whenever the
seat-backs are in an upright position.
See page for how to unlatch a belt,
and page for how to relatch a belt.
91
17
18
17
Adjust the Head Restraints Fasten and Position the Seat
Belts
4. 5.
Protecting Adults and Teens
Driver and Passenger Safety
15
Improperly positioning head
restraints reduces their
effectiveness, and you can be
seriously injured in a crash.
Make sure head restraints are
in place and positioned properly
before driving.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Position the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across your hips,
then pull up on the shoulder part of
the belt so the lap part fits snugly.
This lets your strong pelvic bones
take the force of a crash and reduces
the chance of internal injuries.
This spreads the forces of a crash
over the strongest bones in your
upper body.
If the seat belt touches or crosses
your neck, or if it crosses your arm
instead of your shoulder, you need to
adjust the seat belt anchor height.
The front seats have adjustable seat
belt anchors. To adjust the height of
an anchor, press and hold the release
buttons, and slide the anchor up or
down as needed (it has four
positions).
If necessary, pull up on the belt again
to remove any slack, then check that
the belt rests across the center of
your chest and over your shoulder.
Protecting Adults and Teens
16
RELEASE
BUTTON
Improperly positioning the seat
belts can cause serious injury
or death in a crash.
Make sure all seat belts are
properly positioned before
driving.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
For the third row outer positions,
slide out the outer shoulder belt
from the clip and pull the belt out to
extend it.
Pull out the anchor latch and the
latch plate from each holding slot in
the ceiling, and pull out the seat belt
to extend it.
Insert the hook at the end of the
anchor latch into the anchor buckle
by lining up the triangle marks on
the anchor latch and buckle. Make
sure the belt is not twisted. Push the
anchor latch until it locks. Then
follow the procedure for fastening
and positioning an ordinary seat belt
(see page ).15
Protecting Adults and Teens
Using the Lap/Shoulder Belt
Driver and Passenger Safety
17
LATCH PLATE
ANCHOR LATCH
ANCHOR BUCKLE
ANCHOR LATCH
TRIANGLE
MARKS
THIRD ROW OUTER POSITION
SECOND AND THIRD ROW CENTER
POSITION
CLIP
LATCH PLATE
ANCHOR LATCH
Using a seat belt with the
detachable seat belt anchor
unlatched increases the chance
of serious injury or death in a
crash.
Before using the seat belt,
make sure the detachable seat
belt anchor is correctly latched.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This could cause
very serious injuries in a crash.
See page for additional
information about your seat belts
and how to take care of them.
If a seat belt does not seem to work
properly, it may not protect the
occupant in a crash.
Using a seat
belt that is not working properly can
result in serious injury or death.
Have your dealer check the belt as
soon as possible.
After all occupants have adjusted
their seats and put on seat belts, it is
very important that they continue to
sit upright, well back in their seats,
with their feet on the floor, until the
vehicle is parked and the engine is
off.
Sitting improperly can increase the
chance of injury during a crash. For
example, if an occupant slouches,
lies down, turns sideways, sits
forward, leans forward or sideways,
or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash is
greatly increased.
To unlatch the detachable seat belt
anchor before folding down the seat-
back, insert your ignition key into
the slot on the side of the anchor
buckle and allow the seat belt to
retract. For the center seating
positions, place the latch plate and
anchor latch into their holding slots
in the ceiling. For the third row outer
seating positions, re-fasten the belt
with the clip.
21
Protecting Adults and Teens
Maintain a Proper Sitting
Position
6.
Never place the shoulder portion of a
lap/shoulder belt under your arm or
behind your back.
No one should sit in a seat with an
inoperative seat belt.
18
ANCHOR LATCH
ANCHOR BUCKLE
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you are pregnant, the best way to
protect yourself and your unborn
child when driving or riding in a
vehicle is to always wear a seat belt,
and keep the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across the hips.
Each time you have a checkup, ask
your doctor if it’s okay for you to
drive.
In addition, an occupant who is out of
position in the front seat can be
seriously or fatally injured in a crash
by striking interior parts of the
vehicle or being struck by an
inflating front airbag.
When driving, remember to sit
upright and adjust the seat as far
back as possible while allowing full
control of the vehicle. When riding
as a front passenger, adjust the seat
as far back as possible.
This will reduce the risk of injuries
to both you and your unborn child
that can be caused by a crash or an
inflating front airbag.
Advice for Pregnant Women
Protecting Adults and Teens
Driver and Passenger Safety
19
Sitting improperly or out of
position can result in serious
injury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright, well back in
the seat, with your feet on the
floor.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
A passenger who is not
wearing a seat belt during a crash
or emergency stop can be thrown
against the inside of the vehicle,
against other occupants, or out of
the vehicle.
If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
Objects on
the covers marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’
could interfere with the proper
operation of the airbags or be
propelled inside the vehicle and
hurt someone if the airbags inflate.
If a side airbag or a
side curtain airbag inflates, a cup
holder or other solid object
attached on or near the door could
be propelled inside the vehicle and
hurt someone.
Devices intended to improve
occupant comfort or reposition the
shoulder part of a seat belt can
reduce the protective capability of
the seat belt and increase the
chance of serious injury in a crash.
Carrying hard or sharp
objects on your lap, or driving with
a pipe or other sharp object in
your mouth, can result in injuries
if your front airbag inflates.
If your
hands or arms are close to an
airbag cover, they could be injured
if the airbag inflates.
Additional Safety Precautions
Never let passengers ride in the
cargo area or on top of a folded-
down back seat.
Passengers should not stand up or
change seats while the vehicle is
moving.
Two people should never use the
same seat belt.
Do not attach or place objects on
the front airbag covers.
Do not attach solid objects on or
near a door.
Do not put any accessories on seat
belts.
Do not place hard or sharp objects
between yourself and a front
airbag.
Keep your hands and arms away
from the airbag covers.
Protecting Adults and Teens
20
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your seat belt system includes lap/
shoulder belts in all seating positions.
The front seat belts are also
equipped with automatic seat belt
tensioners.
The seat belt system
includes an indicator on the
instrument panel and a beeper to
remind you and your passengers to
fasten your seat belts.
This system uses the same sensors
as the front airbags to monitor
whether the front seat belts are
latched or unlatched, and how much
weight is on the front passenger’s
seat (see pages and ).
If the indicator comes on or the
beeper sounds when the driver’s seat
belt is latched and there is no front
seat passenger and no items on the
front seat, something may be
interfering with the monitoring
system. Look for and remove:
Any objects hanging on the seat or
in the seat-back pocket.
Any objects, such as a folded-down
back seat, that is touching the rear
of the seat-back.
Any items under the front
passenger’s seat.
If no obstructions are found, have
your vehicle checked by a dealer.
If a front passenger does not fasten
their seat belt, the indicator will
come on about 6 seconds after the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
(II) position.
If either the driver or a front
passenger does not fasten their seat
belt, the beeper will sound and the
indicator will flash again at regular
intervals.
When no one is sitting in the front
passenger’s seat, or a child or small
adult is riding there, the indicator
should not come on and the beeper
should not sound.
This system monitors the front seat
belts. If you turn the ignition switch
to the ON (II) position before your
seat belt is fastened, the beeper will
sound and the indicator will flash. If
your seat belt is not fastened before
the beeper stops, the indicator will
stop flashing but remain on.
3130
Seat Belt System Components
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Driver and Passenger Safety
21
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The lap/shoulder belt in the center
seat of the second and third row
seats is equipped with a detachable
anchor that has two parts: a small
latch plate and a buckle.
The detachable anchor should
normally be latched whenever the
seats-backs are in an upright position.
For more information about the
detachable anchor (see page ).
To fasten the belt, insert the latch
plate into the buckle, then tug on the
belt to make sure the buckle is
latched (see page for how to
properly position the belt).
To unlock the belt, press the red
PRESSbuttononthebuckle.Guide
the belt across your body so that it
retracts completely. After exiting the
vehicle, be sure the belt is out of the
way and will not get closed in the
door.
All seat belts have an emergency
locking retractor. In normal driving,
the retractor lets you move freely in
your seat while it keeps some
tension on the belt. During a collision
or sudden stop, the retractor
automatically locks the belt to help
restrain your body.
The seat belts in all positions except
the driver’s have an additional
lockable retractor that must be
activated to secure a child seat (see
page ).
If the shoulder part of the belt is
pulled all the way out, the lockable
retractor will activate. The belt will
retract, but it will not allow the
passenger to move freely.
To deactivate the lockable retractor,
unlatch the buckle and let the seat
belt fully retract. To refasten the
seat belt, pull it out only as far as
needed.
The lap/shoulder belt goes over
your shoulder, across your chest,
and across your hips.
49
15
17
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Lap/Shoulder Belt
22
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The tensioners are designed to
activate in any collision severe
enough to cause a front, side, or side
curtainairbagtoinflate.
For safety, you should check the
condition of your seat belts regularly.
Pull each belt out fully, and look for
frays, cuts, burns, and wear. Check
that the latches work smoothly and
the belts retract easily. If a belt does
not retract easily, cleaning the belt
may correct the problem (see page
). Any belt that is not in good
condition or working properly will
not provide good protection and
should be replaced as soon as
possible.
The tensioners can also be activated
during a collision in which the front
airbags . In this case, the
airbags would not be needed, but the
additional restraint could be helpful.
If a side airbag or side curtain airbag
deploys during a side impact, the
tensioner on that side of the vehicle
will also deploy.
When the tensioners are activated,
the seat belts will remain tight until
they are unbuckled.
Honda provides a limited warranty
on seat belts. See your
booklet for
details.
For added protection, the front seat
belts are equipped with automatic
seat belt tensioners. When activated,
the tensioners immediately tighten
the belts to help hold the driver and
a front passenger in position.
254
CONTINUED
do not deploy
Honda
Warranty Information
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners Seat Belt Maintenance
Driver and Passenger Safety
23
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The dealer should also inspect the
anchors for damage and replace
them if needed. If the automatic seat
belt tensioners activate during a
crash, they must be replaced.
If a seat belt is worn during a crash,
it must be replaced by your dealer. A
belt that has been worn during a
crash may not provide the same level
of protection in a subsequent crash.
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
24
Not checking or maintaining
seat belts can result in serious
injury or death if the seat belts
do not work properly when
needed.
Check your seat belts regularly,
and have any problem
corrected as soon as possible.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Airbag System Components
Driver and Passenger Safety
25
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(8)
(10)
(8)
(7)
(9)
(9)
(11)
(5)
(4)
(12)
(13)
(14)
(1)
(1) Driver’s Front Airbag
(2) Passenger’s Front Airbag
(3) Control Unit
(4) Seat Belt Tensioners
(5) Side Airbags
(6) Driver’s Seat Position Sensor
(7) Front Passenger’s Position Sensors
(8) Front Impact Sensors
(9) Side Impact Sensors (First)
(10) Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
(11) Occupant Position Detection System
(OPDS) Sensors
(12) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors/
OPDS Sensors Control Unit
(13) Rollover Sensor
(14) Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Indicator
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Two SRS (supplemental restraint
system) front airbags. The driver’s
airbag is stored in the center of
the steering wheel; the front
passenger’sairbagisstoredinthe
dashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRS
AIRBAG’’ (see page ).
Two side airbags, one for the
driver and one for a front
passenger. The airbags are stored
in the outer edges of the seat-
backs. Both are marked ‘‘SIDE
AIRBAG’’ (see page ).
Your Airbag System includes:
Two side curtain airbags, one for
each side of the vehicle. The
airbags are stored in the ceiling,
above the side windows. The front
and rear pillars are marked ‘‘SIDE
CURTAIN AIRBAG’’ (see page
).
28
31
33
Additional Information About Your Airbags
26
(15) Rear Safing Sensor
(16) Side Impact Sensor (second)
(17) Side Curtain Airbags
(17)
(16)
(15)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Automatic front seat belt
tensioners (see page ).
An indicator on the instrument
panel that alerts you that the
passenger’s side airbag has been
turned off (see page ).
An indicator on the dashboard that
alerts you that the passenger’s
front airbag has been turned off
(see page ).
Emergency backup power in case
your vehicle’s electrical system is
disconnected in a crash.
Sensors that can detect a
moderate to severe front impact,
side impact, or if your vehicle is
about to rollover.
Weight sensors that monitor the
weight on the front passenger’s
seat. If the weight is about 65 lbs
(29 kg) or less (the weight of an
infant or small child), the
passenger’s front airbag will be
turned off (see page ).
A sophisticated electronic system
that continually monitors and
records information about the
sensors, the control unit, the
airbag activators, the seat belt
tensioners, and driver and front
passenger seat belt use when the
ignition switch is in the ON (II)
position.
An indicator on the instrument
panel that alerts you to a possible
problem with your airbags,
sensors, or seat belt tensioners
(see page ).
A rollover sensor that can detect if
your vehicle is about to roll over
and signal the control unit to
deploy both side curtain airbags
and front seat belt tensioners (see
page ).
A driver’s seat position sensor that
monitors the distance of the seat
from the front airbag. If the seat is
too far forward, the airbag will
inflate with less force (see page
).
Sensors that can detect whether
the driver’s seat belt and a front
passenger’s seat belt is latched or
unlatched (see page ).
Sensors that can detect whether a
small person or child is in the
passenger’s side airbag path and
signal the control unit to turn the
airbag off (see page ).
23
34
33
34
30
33
21
30
35
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
27
Main Menu
Table of Contents
During a frontal crash, your seat belt
restrains your lower body and torso,
and the front airbag helps protect
your head and chest.
This can happen if the severity of a
collision is at the margin, or
threshold, that determines whether
or not the airbags will deploy. In
such cases, the seat belt will provide
sufficient protection, and the
supplemental protection offered by
the airbag would be minimal.
Only the driver’s airbag can deploy if
there is no passenger in the front
seat, or if the advanced airbag
system has turned the passenger’s
airbag off (see page ).
If you ever have a moderate to
severe frontal collision, sensors will
detect the vehicle’s rapid
deceleration.
If the rate of deceleration is high
enough, the control unit will instantly
inflate the driver’s and front
passenger’s airbags, at the time and
with the force needed.
After inflating, the front airbags
immediately deflate, so they won’t
interfere with the driver’s visibility,
or the ability to steer or operate
other controls.
Although both airbags normally
inflate within a split second of each
other, it is possible for only one
airbag to deploy.
35
How Your Front Airbags Work
Additional Information About Your Airbags
28
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your front airbags are also dual-
threshold airbags. Airbags with this
feature have two deployment
thresholds that depend on whether
sensors detect the occupant is
wearing a seat belt or not.
If the occupant’s belt is ,
the airbag will deploy at a slightly
lower threshold, because the
occupant would need extra
protection.
Your front airbags are dual-stage
airbags. This means they have two
inflation stages that can be ignited
sequentially or simultaneously,
depending on crash severity.
In a crash, both stages
will ignite simultaneously to provide
the quickest and greatest protection.
In a crash, one stage will
ignite first, then the second stage
will ignite a split second later. This
provides longer airbag inflation time
with a little less force.
The total time for inflation and
deflation is one-tenth of a second, so
fast that most occupants are not
aware that the airbags deployed until
they see them lying in their laps.
After a crash, you may see what
looks like smoke. This is actually
powder from the airbag’s surface.
Although the powder is not harmful,
people with respiratory problems
mayexperiencesometemporary
discomfort. If this occurs, get out of
the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do
so. If the occupant’s belt is , the
airbag will inflate at a slightly higher
threshold, when the airbag would be
needed to supplement the protection
provided by the seat belt.
CONTINUED
Dual-Threshold Airbags
not latched
Dual-Stage Airbags
more severe
less severe
latched
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
29
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your front airbags are also advanced
airbags. The main purpose of this
feature is to help prevent airbag-
caused injuries to short drivers and
children who ride in front.
For both advanced airbags to work
properly:
Occupants must sit upright and
wear their seat belts properly.
The driver’s advanced front airbag
system includes a seat position
sensor under the seat. If the seat is
too far forward, the airbag will
inflate with less force, regardless of
the severity of the impact.
The passenger’s advanced front
airbag system has weight sensors
under the seat. Although Honda
does not encourage carrying an
infant or small child in front, if the
sensors detect the weight of an
infant or small child (up to about 65
lbs or 29 kg), the system will
automatically turn the passenger’s
front airbag off.
Second-row passengers should not
put their feet under the front seats.
Failure to follow these instructions
could damage the sensors or prevent
them from working properly.
If there is a problem with the sensor,
the SRS indicator will come on, and
the airbag will inflate in the normal
manner regardless of the driver’s
seating position.
Be aware that objects placed on the
passenger’s seat can also cause the
airbag to be turned off.
Do not spill any liquids on or
under the seats, cover the sensors,
or put any cargo or metal objects
under the front seats.
Advanced Airbags
Additional Information About Your Airbags
30
DRIVER’S
SEAT
POSITION
SENSOR
PASSENGER’S
SEAT WEIGHT
SENSOR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Moving the front seat forcibly
back against cargo on the seat or
floor behind it.
Hanging heavy items on the front
passenger seat, or placing heavy
items in the seat-back pocket.
When the airbag is turned off, a
‘‘passenger airbag off’’ indicator in
the center of the dashboard comes
on (see page ).
If you ever have a moderate to
severe side impact, sensors will
detect rapid acceleration and signal
the control unit to instantly inflate
either the driver’s or the passenger’s
side airbag and activate the seat belt
tensioner.
Moving the front seat or seat-back
forcibly back against the folded
rear seat.
If the weight sensors detect that
there is no passenger in the front
seat, the airbag will be off. However,
the Passenger Airbag Off indicator
will not come on.
To ensure that the passenger’s
advanced airbag system will work
properly,
A second-row passenger pushing
or pulling on the back of the front
passenger’s seat.
35
CONTINUED
How Your Side Airbags Work
Additional Information About Your Airbags
do not do anything that
would increase or decrease the
weight on the front passenger’s seat,
such as hanging heavy objects on the
seat.
Driver and Passenger Safety
31
Main Menu
Table of Contents
There will be some delay between
the moment the passenger moves
into or out of the airbag deployment
pathandwhentheindicatorcomes
on or goes off.
Only one airbag will deploy during a
side impact. If the impact is on the
passenger’s side, the passenger’s
side airbag will deploy even if there
is no passenger.
If the side airbag off indicator comes
on (see page ), have the
passenger sit upright. Once the
passenger is out of the airbag’s
deployment path, the system will
turn the airbag back on, and the
indicator will go out.
Your vehicle has a side airbag cutoff
system designed primarily to protect
a child riding in the front passenger’s
seat.
Thesideairbagmayalsoshutoffifa
short adult leans sideways, or a
larger adult slouches and leans
sideways into the airbag’s
deployment path.
Objects placed on the front
passenger seat can also cause the
side airbag to be shut off.
To get the best protection from the
side airbags, front seat occupants
should wear their seat belts and sit
upright and well back in their seats.
Although Honda does not encourage
children to ride in front, this system
is designed to shut off the side
airbag if a child leans into the side
airbag’s deployment path.
A front seat passenger should not
use a cushion or other object as a
backrest. It may prevent the cutoff
system from working properly.
35
Side Airbag Cutoff System
Additional Information About Your Airbags
32
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If the impact is on the passenger’s
side, the passenger’s side curtain
airbag will inflate even if there are no
occupants on that side of the vehicle.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, this indicator
comes on briefly then goes off. This
tells you the system is working
properly.
In a moderate to severe side impact,
sensors will detect rapid acceleration
and signal the control unit to
instantly inflate the side curtain
airbag and activate the seat belt
tensioner on the driver’s or the
passenger’s side of the vehicle.
The SRS indicator alerts
you to a potential problem
with your airbags or seat belt
tensioners (see page ).
If the rollover sensor detects your
vehicle is about to roll over, it will
signal the control unit which will
instantly deploy both side curtain
airbags and activate the front seat
belt tensioners (see page ).
The airbag on the passenger’s side
will deploy, and the seat belt
tensioner will activate, even if there
are no passengers on that side of the
vehicle.
To get the best protection from the
side curtain airbags, occupants
should wear their seat belts and sit
upright and well back in their seats.
23
23
CONTINUED
How Your Side Curtain Airbags
Work
How the SRS Indicator Works
In a Side Impact
In a Rollover
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Driver and Passenger Safety
33
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This indicator
alerts you that the
passenger’s side
airbag has been automatically shut
off. It does mean there is a
problem with your side airbags.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, the indicator
should come on briefly and then go
off(seepage ).Ifitdoesn’tcome
on, stays on, or comes on while
driving without a passenger in the
front seat, have the system checked.
If the indicator comes on at any
other time, or does not come on at all,
you should have the system checked
by your dealer. For example:
If the SRS indicator does not come
on after you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position.
If the indicator stays on after the
engine starts.
If the indicator comes on or
flashesonandoffwhileyoudrive.
If you see any of these indications,
the airbags and seat belt tensioners
may not work properly when you
need them.
63
How the Side Airbag Off
Indicator Works
not
Additional Information About Your Airbags
34
U.S.
Canada
Ignoring the SRS indicator can
result in serious injury or death
if the airbag systems or
tensioners do not work properly.
Have your vehicle checked by a
dealer as soon as possible if
the SRS indicator alerts you to
a possible problem.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This indicator alerts you that the
passenger’s front airbag has been
shut off because weight sensors
detect about 65 lbs (29 kg) or less
(the weight of an infant or small
child) on the front passenger’s seat.
It does there is a problem
with the airbag.
Be aware that objects placed on the
front seat can cause the indicator to
come on.
If no weight is detected on the front
seat, the airbag will be automatically
shut off. However, the indicator will
not come on.
The passenger airbag off indicator
may come on and off repeatedly if
the total weight on the seat is near
the airbag cutoff threshold.
If an adult or teenage passenger is
riding in front, move the seat as far
to the rear as possible, and have the
passenger sit upright and wear the
seat belt properly.
CONTINUED
Additional Information About Your Airbags
How the Passenger Airbag Off
Indicator Works
not mean
Driver and Passenger Safety
35
U.S. models Canadian models
2WD
4WD
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR
2WD4WD
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If the indicator comes on with no
front seat passenger and no objects
on the seat, or with an adult riding
there, something may be interfering
with the weight sensors. Look for
and remove:
Any items under the front
passenger’s seat.
Any object hanging on the seat or
in the seat-back pocket.
Any object, such as a folded-down
back seat, that is touching the rear
of the seat-back.
If no obstructions are found, have
your vehicle checked by a dealer as
soon as possible.
Your airbag system is virtually
maintenance-free, and there are no
parts you can safely service.
However, you must have your
vehicle serviced if:
Any airbag
that has deployed must be
replaced along with the control
unit and other related parts. If a
front airbag inflates, the seat belt
tensioners must also be replaced.
Do not try to remove or replace
anyairbagbyyourself.Thismust
be done by an authorized dealer or
a knowledgeable body shop.
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Airbag Service
An airbag ever inflates.
36
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Improperly replacing
or covering front seat-back covers
can prevent your side airbags from
inflating during a side impact.
If water or
another liquid soaks into a seat-
back, it can prevent the side airbag
cutoff system from working
properly.
This could make the
driver’s seat position sensor or the
front passenger’s weight sensors
ineffective. If it is necessary to
remove or modify a front seat to
accommodate a person with
disabilities, first contact American
Honda at 800-999-1009.
Tampering could cause
the airbags to deploy, possibly
causing very serious injury.
Together, airbags and
seat belts provide the best
protection.
Take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer as soon as
possible. If you ignore this
indication, your airbags may not
operate properly.
Even if your
airbags do not inflate, your dealer
should inspect the driver’s seat
position sensor, the front
passenger’s weight sensors, the
front seat belt tensioners, and all
seat belts worn during the crash to
make sure they are operating
properly.
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Do not cover or replace front seat-
back covers without consulting
your dealer.
Do not expose the front passenger’s
seat-back to liquid.
Do not remove or modify a f ront
seat without consulting your
dealer.
Do not tamper with airbag
components or wiring for any
reason.
Donotattempttodeactivateyour
airbags.
The SRS indicator alerts you to a
problem.
If your vehicle has a moderate to
severe impact.
Additional Safety Precautions
Driver and Passenger Safety
37
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
If you have children, or ever need to
drive with a child in your vehicle, be
sure to read this section. It begins
with important general guidelines,
then presents special information for
infants, small children, and larger
children.
(see pages ).
(see pages ).
Children depend on adults to protect
them. However, despite their best
intentions, many adults do not know
how to protect child
passengers.
Each year, many children are injured
or killed in vehicle crashes because
they are either unrestrained or not
properly restrained. In fact, vehicle
accidents are the number one cause
of the death of children age 12 and
under.
To reduce the number of child
deaths and injuries, every U.S. state
and Canadian province requires that
infants and children be properly
restrained when they ride in a
vehicle.
43 52
53 56
properly
Protecting Children General Guidelines
All Children Must Be Restrained
Infants and small children must be
restrained in an approved child seat
that is properly secured to the
vehicle
Larger children must be restrained
with a lap/shoulder belt and ride on
a booster seat until the seat belt fits
them properly
38
Children who are unrestrained
or improperly restrained can be
seriously injured or killed in a
crash.
Any child too small for a seat
belt should be properly
restrained in a child seat. A
larger child should be properly
restrained with a seat belt and
use a booster seat if necessary.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
CONTINUED
Even though your vehicle has an
advanced front airbag system that
automatically turns the passenger’s
front airbag off (see page ),
please follow these guidelines:
If
the airbag inflates, it can hit the back
of the child seat with enough force
to kill or very seriously injure an
infant.
Front airbags have been designed to
help protect adults in a moderate to
severe frontal collisions. To do this
the passenger’s front airbag is quite
large, and it can inflate with enough
force to cause very serious injuries.
According to accident statistics,
children of all ages and sizes are
safer when they are restrained in a
back seat. The National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration and
Transport Canada recommend that
all children age 12 and under be
properly restrained in a back seat.
Some states have laws restricting
where children may ride.
Children who ride in back are less
likely to be injured by striking
interior vehicle parts during a
collision or hard braking. Also,
children cannot be injured by an
inflating front airbag when they ride
in the back.
If the vehicle seat is
too far forward, or the child’s head is
thrown forward during a collision, an
inflating front airbag can strike the
child with enough force to kill or
very seriously injure a small child.
Whenever possible,
larger children should sit in the back
seat, on a booster seat if needed, and
be properly restrained with a seat
belt (see page for important
information about protecting larger
children).
35
53
Protecting Children General Guidelines
Small Children
Larger Children
Infants
Never put a rear-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s front airbag.
Placing a f orward-f acing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s front airbag can
be hazardous.
Children who have outgrown child
seats are also at risk of being injured
or killed by an inflating passenger’s
front airbag.
All Children Should Sit in a Back
Seat
The Passenger’s Front Airbag
Can Pose Serious Risks
Driver and Passenger Safety
39
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
To remind you of the passenger’s
front airbag hazards, and that
children must be properly restrained
in a back seat, your vehicle has
warninglabelsonthedashboard(on
U.S. models, the dashboard label is
removedbytheowner)andonthe
front visors. Please read and follow
the instructions on these labels.
Protecting Children General Guidelines
U.S. Models
Canadian Models
40
DASHBOARD
SUN VISORS
SUN VISORS
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
Many parents say they prefer to put
an infant or a small child in the front
passenger seat so they can watch the
child, or because the child requires
attention.
Placing a child in the front seat
exposes the child to hazards in a
frontal collision, and paying close
attention to a child distracts the
driver from the important tasks of
driving, placing both of you at risk.
Place the largest child in the front
seat, provided the child is large
enough to wear the lap/shoulder
belt properly (see page ).
Move the vehicle seat as far to the
rear as possible (see page ).
Have the child sit upright and well
backintheseat(seepage ).
Make sure the seat belt is properly
positioned and secured (see page
).
Your vehicle has two rows of back
seats where children can be properly
restrained. If you ever have to carry
a group of children, and a child must
ride in front:
If a child requires close physical
attention or frequent visual
contact, we strongly recommend
that another adult ride with the
child in a back seat. The back seat
is far safer for a child than the
front.
53
18
18
13
Protecting Children General Guidelines
If a Child Requires Close
Attention
If You Must Drive with Several
Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
41
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
If you are not wearing a
seat belt in a crash, you could be
thrown forward and crush the
child against the dashboard or a
seat-back. If you are wearing a
seat belt, the child can be torn
from your arms and be seriously
hurt or killed.
If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
For example, infants and small
childrenleftinavehicleonahot
day can die from heatstroke. A
child left alone with the key in the
ignition switch can accidentally set
the vehicle in motion, possibly
injuring themselves or others.
Children who play in vehicles can
accidentally get trapped inside.
Teach your children not to play in
or around vehicles.
If a child wraps a loose
seat belt around their neck, they
can be seriously or fatally injured.
(See pages and for how to
activate and deactivate the
lockable retractor.)
Leaving children without
adult supervision is illegal in most
states and Canadian provinces,
and can be very hazardous.
This can prevent
children from accidentally falling
out (see page ).
During a crash, the
belt could press deep into the child
and cause serious or fatal injuries.
Even very young
children learn how to unlock
vehicle doors, turn on the ignition
switch, and open the tailgate,
which can lead to accidental injury
or death.
83
49 50
Additional Safety Precautions
Protecting Children General Guidelines
Neverholdaninfantorchildon
your lap.
Never let two children use the
same seat belt.
Lock all doors and the tailgate
when your vehicle is not in use.
Make sure any unused seat belt
that a child can reach is buckled,
the lockable retractor is activated,
and the belt is fully retracted and
locked.
Do not leave children alone in a
vehicle.
Use the childproof door locks to
prevent children from opening the
rear doors.
Never put a seat belt over yourself
and a child.
Keep vehicle keys/remote
transmitters out of the reach of
children.
42
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
An infant must be properly
restrained in a rear-facing, reclining
child seat until the child reaches the
seat maker’s weight or height limit
for the seat, and the child is at least
one year old.
Only a rear-facing child seat provides
proper support for a baby’s head,
neck, and back.
Two types of seats may be used: a
seat designed exclusively for infants,
or a convertible seat used in the rear-
facing, reclining mode.
If placed
facing forward, an infant could be
very seriously injured during a
frontal collision.
If the passenger’s front airbag
inflates, it can hit the back of the
child seat with enough force to kill or
seriously injure an infant.
A rear-facing child seat can be placed
in any seating position in the back
seat, but not in the front.
When properly installed in the
second row, a rear-facing child seat
maypreventthedriverorafront
passenger from moving their seat as
far back as recommended, or from
locking their seat-back in the desired
position.
It could also interfere with proper
operation of the passenger’s
advanced front airbag system.
Protecting Infants and Small Children
Protecting Infants
Child Seat Type
Do not put a rear-facing child seat in
a forward-facing position.
Rear-facing Child Seat Placement
Never put a
rear-facing child seat in the front
seat.
Driver and Passenger Safety
43
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Of the different seats available, we
recommend those that have a five-
point harness system as shown.
We strongly recommend placing a
forward-facing child seat in a back
seat, not the front.
In any of these situations, we
strongly recommend that you install
the child seat directly behind the
front passenger’s seat, move the seat
as far forward as needed, and leave it
unoccupied. Or, you may wish to get
a smaller rear-facing child seat.
A child who is at least one year old,
and who fits within the child seat
maker’s weight and height limits,
should be restrained in a forward-
facing, upright child seat.
If the vehicle seat is too
far forward, or the child’s head is
thrown forward during a collision, an
inflating airbag can strike the child
with enough force to cause very
serious or fatal injuries.
Even with advanced front airbags,
which can automatically turn the
passenger’s front airbag off (see
page ), a back seat is the safest
place for a small child.
35
Protecting Infants and Small Children
Protecting Small Children
Child Seat Type
Placing a f orward-f acing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s airbag can be
hazardous.
Child Seat Placement
44
Placing a rear-facing child seat
in the front seat can result in
serious injury or death during a
collision.
Always place a rear-facing child
seat in the back seat, not the
front.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Since LATCH-compatible child seats
are easier to install and reduce the
possibility of improper installation,
we recommend selecting this style.
We also recommend selecting a
LATCH-compatible seat with a rigid,
rather than a flexible, anchor (see
page ).
In seating positions and vehicles not
equipped with LATCH, a LATCH-
compatible child seat can be installed
using a seat belt.
If it is necessary to put a forward-
facing child seat in the front, move
the vehicle seat as far to the rear as
possible, and be sure the child seat is
firmly secured to the vehicle and the
child is properly strapped in the seat. Whatever type of seat you choose, to
provide proper protection, a child
seat should meet three
requirements:
When buying a child seat, you need
to choose either a conventional child
seat, or one designed for use with
the lower anchors and tethers for
children (LATCH) system.
Conventional child seats must be
secured to a vehicle with a seat belt,
whereas LATCH-compatible seats
are secured by attaching the seat to
hardware built into the two outer
second row seats.
47
CONTINUED
Protecting Infants and Small Children, Selecting a Child Seat
Selecting a Child Seat
Driver and Passenger Safety
45
Placing a forward-facing child
seat in the front seat can result
in serious injury or death if the
front airbag inflates.
Ifyoumustplaceaforward-
facing child seat in front, move
the vehicle seat as far back as
possible, and properly restrain
the child.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
After selecting a proper child seat
and a good place to install the seat,
there are three main steps in
installing the seat:
All child seats must be
secured to the vehicle with the lap
part of a lap/shoulder belt or with
the LATCH (lower anchors and
tethers for children) system. A
child whose seat is not properly
secured to the vehicle can be
endangered in a crash.
After installing a child
seat, push and pull the seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure.
A child seat secured with a seat belt
should be installed as firmly as
possible. However, it does not need
to be ‘‘rock solid.’’ Some side-to-side
movement can be expected and
should not reduce the child seat’s
effectiveness.
If the child seat is not secure, try
installing it in a different seating
position, or use a different style of
child seat that can be firmly secured.
Make sure the child is properly
strappedinthechildseat
according to the child seat maker’s
instructions. A child who is not
properly secured in a child seat
can be seriously injured in a crash.
Look for FMVSS
213 or CMVSS 213 on the box.
Rear-facing for infants, forward-
facing for small children.
Before purchasing a conventional
child seat, or using a previously
purchased one, we recommend that
you test the seat in the specific
vehicle seating position or positions
where the seat will be used.
The following pages provide
guidelines on how to properly install
a child seat. A forward-facing child
seat is used in all examples, but the
instructions are the same for rear-
facing child seats.
Selecting a Child Seat, Installing a Child Seat
Installing a Child Seat
Properly secure the child seat to
the vehicle.
Make sure the child seat is firmly
secured.
Secure the child in the child seat.
The child seat should meet U.S. or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard 213.
The child seat should be of the
proper type and size to fit the child.
The child seat should fit the
vehicle seating position (or
positions) where it will be used.
3.
1.
2.
1.
2.
3.
46
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Make sure there are no objects
near the anchors that could
prevent a secure connection
between the child seat and the
anchors.
Move the seat belt buckle or
tongue away from the lower
anchors.
To install a LATCH-compatible child
seat:
Place the child seat on the vehicle
seat, then attach the seat to the
lower anchors according to the
child seat maker’s instructions.
Your vehicle is equipped with
LATCH (lower anchors and tethers
for children) at the outer second row
seats. The lower anchors are located
between the seat-back and seat
bottom, and are to be used only with
a child seat designed for use with
LATCH.
The location of each lower anchor is
indicated by a small button above the
anchor point.
Some LATCH-compatible seats
have a rigid-type connector as
shown above.
1.
2.
3.
CONTINUED
Installing a Child Seat
Installing a Child Seat with
LATCH
Driver and Passenger Safety
47
LOWER
ANCHORS
BUTTON
Rigid-type
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Whatever type you have, follow
the child seat maker’s instructions
for adjusting or tightening the fit.
Lift the head restraint (see page
), then route the tether strap
through the legs of the head
restraint and over the seat-back,
making sure the strap is not
twisted.
Attach the tether strap hook to the
tether anchor, then tighten the
strap as instructed by the child
seat maker.
Other LATCH-compatible seats
have a flexible-type connector as
shown above.
Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure.
4.
5.
6.
7.
91
Installing a Child Seat
48
TETHER STRAP HOOK
ANCHOR
Flexible-type
Main Menu
Table of Contents
When not using the LATCH system,
all child seats must be secured to the
vehicle with the lap part of a lap/
shoulder belt.
With the child seat in the desired
seating position, route the belt
through the child seat according
to the seat maker’s instructions,
then insert the latch plate into the
buckle.
To activate the lockable retractor,
slowly pull the shoulder part of the
belt all the way out until it stops,
then let the belt feed back into the
retractor.
After the belt has retracted, tug on
it. If the belt is locked, you will not
be able to pull it out. If you can pull
thebeltout,itisnotlocked,and
you will need to repeat these steps.
In addition, the lap/shoulder belts in
all seating positions except the
driver’s have a lockable retractor
that must be activated to secure a
child seat.
If you intend to install a child seat in
the center seating position of the
secondroworinthethirdrow,make
sure the detachable seat belt is
securely latched (see page ).
1. 2.
3.
17
CONTINUED
Installing a Child Seat
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/
Shoulder Belt
Driver and Passenger Safety
49
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To deactivate the lockable retractor
and remove a child seat, unlatch the
buckle, unroute the seat belt, and let
the belt fully retract.
Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side-to-side to
verify that it is secure enough to
stay upright during normal driving
maneuvers. If the child seat is not
secure, unlatch the belt, allow it to
retract fully, then repeat these
steps.
To remove slack, it may help to
putweightonthechildseat,or
push on the back of the seat while
pulling up on the belt.
After confirming that the belt is
locked, grab the shoulder part of
the belt near the buckle, and pull
up to remove any slack from the
lap part of the belt. Remember, if
the lap part of the belt is not tight,
the child seat will not be secure.
4. 5.
Installing a Child Seat
50
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Each second row seat has a tether
anchorage point behind the seat-
back.
A child seat with a tether can be
installed in any seating position in
the second or third row seats.
Since a tether can provide additional
security to the lap/shoulder belt
installation, we recommend using a
tether whenever one is required or
available.
After properly securing the child
seat (see page ), lift the head
restraint, then route the tether
strap over the seat-back and
through the head restraint legs.
1.
49
CONTINUED
Installing a Child Seat
Installing a Child Seat with a
Tether
Second Row Installation
Driver and Passenger Safety
51
TETHER ANCHORAGE POINT
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Attach the tether strap hook to the
anchor, making sure the tether
strap is not twisted.
Tighten the strap according to the
seat maker’s instructions.
Each third row seat has a tether
anchorage point on the tailgate sill.
After properly securing the child
seat (see page ), lift the head
restraint, then route the tether
strap over the seat-back and
through the head restraint legs.
Slide the anchor cover open as
shown, then attach the tether
strap hook to the anchor, making
sure the strap is not twisted.
Tighten the strap according to the
seat maker’s instructions.
Follow steps 1 and 2 of the second
row seat installation.
2.
2.
1.
3.
51
Installing a Child Seat
Third Row Installation
52
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To determine if a lap/shoulder belt
properly fits a child, have the child
put on the seat belt, then ask
yourself:
When a child reaches the
recommended weight or height limit
for a forward-facing child seat, the
child should sit in a back seat on a
booster seat and wear a lap/shoulder
belt.
Does the child sit all the way back
against the seat?
Do the child’s knees bend
comfortably over the edge of the
seat?
The following pages give
instructions on how to check proper
seat belt fit, what kind of booster
seat to use if one is needed, and
important precautions for a child
who must sit in front.
1.
2.
CONTINUED
Checking Seat Belt Fit
Protecting Larger Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
53
Allowing a child age 12 or under
to sit in front can result in injury
or death if the passenger’s front
airbag inflates.
If a child must ride in front,
move the vehicle seat as far
back as possible, use a booster
seat if needed, have the child
sit up properly and wear the
seat belt properly.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Does the shoulder belt cross
between the child’s neck and arm?
Is the lap part of the belt as low as
possible, touching the child’s
thighs?
Will the child be able to stay
seated like this for the whole trip?
If you answer yes to all these
questions, the child is ready to wear
the lap/shoulder belt correctly. If
you answer no to any question, the
child needs to ride on a booster seat. A child who has outgrown a forward-
facing child seat should ride in a
back seat and use a booster seat
until the lap/shoulder belt fits them
properly without the booster.
A child may continue using a booster
seat until the tops of their ears are
even with the top of the vehicle’s or
booster’s seat-back. A child of this
height should be tall enough to use
the lap/shoulder belt without a
booster seat.
Booster seats can be high-back or
low-back. Whichever style you select,
make sure the booster seat meets
federal safety standards (see page
) and that you follow the booster
seat maker’s instructions.
If a child who uses a booster seat
must ride in front, move the vehicle
seat as far back as possible, and be
sure the child is wearing the seat
belt properly.
Some states and Canadian provinces
also require children to use a booster
seat until they reach a given age or
weight (e.g., 6 years or 60 lbs). Be
sure to check current laws in the
states or provinces where you intend
to drive.
4.
5.
3.
45
Using a Booster Seat
Protecting Larger Children
54
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you decide that a child can safely
ride up front, be sure to:
Carefully read the owner’s manual,
and make sure you understand all
seat belt instructions and all safety
information.
Move the vehicle seat to the rear-
most position.
Have the child sit up straight, back
against the seat, and feet on or
near the floor.
Check that the child’s seat belt is
properly and securely positioned.
Of course, children vary widely. And
while age may be one indicator of
when a child can safely ride in front,
there are other important factors you
should consider.
A side airbag also poses risks. If any
part of a larger child’s body is in the
path of a deploying side airbag, the
child could receive possibly serious
injuries.
If the passenger’s front airbag
inflates in a moderate to severe
frontal collision, the airbag can cause
serious injuries to a child who is
unrestrained, improperly restrained,
sitting too close to the airbag, or out
of position.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that all children
age 12 and under be properly
restrained in a back seat.
Physically, a child must be large
enough for the lap/shoulder belt to
properly fit (see pages and ). If
the seat belt does not fit properly,
with or without the child sitting on a
booster seat, the child should not sit
in front.
To safely ride in front, a child must
be able to follow the rules, including
sitting properly, and wearing the seat
belt properly throughout a ride.
Supervise the child. Even mature
children sometimes need to be
reminded to fasten the seat belts
or sit properly.
16 53
Physical Size
Maturity
When Can a Larger Child Sit in
Front
Protecting Larger Children
Driver and Passenger Safety
55
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This could result
in serious neck injuries during a
crash.
Devices intended to
improve a child’s comfort or
reposition the shoulder part of a
seat belt can make the belt less
effective and increase the chance
of serious injury in a crash.
This could
cause very serious injuries during
a crash. It also increases the
chance that the child will slide
under the belt in a crash and be
injured.
If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
Do not let a child wear a seat belt
across the neck.
Do not put any accessories on a
seat belt.
Do not let a child put the shoulder
part of a seat belt behind the back
or under the arm.
Two children should never use the
same seat belt.
Additional Safety Precautions
Protecting Larger Children
56
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your vehicle’s exhaust contains
carbon monoxide gas. Carbon
monoxide should not enter the
vehicle in normal driving if you
maintain your vehicle properly and
follow the information on this page.
High levels of carbon monoxide can
collect rapidly in enclosed areas,
such as a garage. Do not run the
engine with the garage door closed.
Even with the door open, run the
engine only long enough to move the
vehicle out of the garage.
With the tailgate open, air flow can
pull exhaust gas into your vehicle’s
interior and create a hazardous
condition. If you must drive with the
tailgate open, open all the windows
and set the heating and cooling
system/climate control system as
shown below.
If you must sit in your parked vehicle
with the engine running, even in an
unconfined area, adjust the heating
and cooling system/climate control
system as follows:
Have the exhaust system inspected
for leaks whenever:
The vehicle is raised for an oil
change.
You notice a change in the sound
of the exhaust.
The vehicle was in an accident
that may have damaged the
underside.
Select the fresh air mode.
Select the mode.
Turn the fan on high speed.
Set the temperature control to a
comfortable setting.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Carbon Monoxide Hazard
Driver and Passenger Safety
57
Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.
Breathing it can cause
unconsciousness and even kill
you.
Avoid any enclosed areas or
activities that expose you to
carbon monoxide.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If a label comes off or becomes hard
to read (except for the U.S.
dashboard label, which is removed
by the owner), contact your dealer
for a replacement.
These labels are in the locations
shown. They warn you of potential
hazards that could cause serious
injury. Read these labels carefully.
U.S. models only
Canadian models
U.S. models
U.S. models only
U.S. models
Canadian models
Safety Labels
58
RADIATOR CAP
HOOD
DASHBOARD
DOORJAMBS
SUN VISORS
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This section gives information about
the controls and displays that
contribute to the daily operation of
your vehicle. All the essential
controls are within easy reach.
...........................Control Locations . 60
............................Instrument Panel . 61
..........Instrument Panel Indicators . 62
.............................................Gauges . 70
...................................Trip Meter . 70
.....................................Odometer . 70
..................................Fuel Gauge . 70
...................Temperature Gauge . 71
Outside Temperature
...................................Indicator . 71
..........Check Fuel Cap Message . 72
Controls Near the Steering
...........................................Wheel . 73
.Windshield Wipers and Washers . 74
.................Turn Signal, Headlights . 75
Automatic Lighting Off
.....................................Feature . 76
............Daytime Running Lights . 76
........Instrument Panel Brightness . 76
.................Hazard Warning Button . 77
.................Rear Window Defogger . 77
..........Steering Wheel Adjustment . 78
...............................Keys and Locks . 79
........................Immobilizer System . 79
................................Ignition Switch . 81
......................................Door Locks . 82
......................Power Door Locks . 82
........................................Tailgate . 82
..................Childproof Door Locks . 83
.......................Remote Transmitter . 83
....................................Seat Heaters . 86
.................................................Seats . 87
..........................Head Restraints . 91
.............................................Mirrors . 92
..............................Power Windows . 94
.........................................Moonroof . 96
.................................Parking Brake . 97
...........Interior Convenience Items . 98
.......................Beverage Holders . 99
...............Console Compartment . 99
....................................Glove Box . 99
....................Sunglasses Holder . 100
................Conversation Mirror . 100
...................................Sun Visor . 101
............................Vanity Mirror . 101
........Accessory Power Sockets . 101
...............................Interior Lights . 102
Instruments and Controls
Instruments and Controls
59
Main Menu
＊
＊
If equipped.
Control Locations
60
MIRROR
CONTROLS
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES
HOOD RELEASE
HANDLE
AUDIO SYSTEM
PARKING BRAKE
PEDAL
GAUGES(P.70)
(P.82)
(P.93)
(P.94)
(P.188)
(P.187) (P.97)
(P.177)
REAR VIEW MIRROR WITH
COMPASS
(P.115)
(P.106)
:
FUEL FILL DOOR
RELEASE HANDLE
HEATING/COOLING
SYSTEM
INSTRUMENT PANEL
INDICATORS
(P.61)
(P.200)
CLIMATE CONTROL
SYSTEM
ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET
(P.101)
(P.113)
REAR A/C CONTROL
SHIFT LEVER
POWER DOOR LOCK
SWITCH
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
If equipped.
The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.
:
Instrument Panel
Instruments and Controls
61
LIGHTS ON INDICATOR
HIGH BEAM INDICATOR
A/T TEMPERATURE
INDICATOR
MAINTENANCE MINDER
INDICATOR
LOW OIL PRESSURE
INDICATOR
VSA ACTIVATION
INDICATOR
CRUISE CONTROL
INDICATOR
SIDE AIRBAG OFF
INDICATOR
LOW FUEL INDICATOR
FOG LIGHT INDICATOR
(P.69)
(P.69)
(P.69)
SEAT BELT REMINDER INDICATOR
(P.67)
(P.68)
(P.64)
VTM-4 INDICATOR
(P.68)
FUEL ECONOMY INDICATOR
(P.68)
CHARGING SYSTEM
INDICATOR
(P.64)
(P.67)
(P.65)
(P.66)
(P.65)
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
INDICATOR
(P.64)
(P.67)
PARKING BRAKE
AND BRAKE
SYSTEM
INDICATOR
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
INDICATOR
MALFUNCTION
INDICATOR LAMP
BRAKE LAMP
INDICATOR
(P.66)
LOW TIRE PRESSURE
INDICATOR
(P.65)
TIRE PRESSURE
MONITORING SYSTEM
(TPMS) INDICATOR
VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST
(VSA) SYSTEM INDICATOR
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) INDICATOR
(P.62, 277)
(P.62, 276)
(P.63, 278)
(P.34, 63)
(P.33, 63)
(P.62, 276)
DOOR AND TAILGATE OPEN MONITOR
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR
(P.63)
(P.21, 62)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The instrument panel has many
indicators to give you important
information about your vehicle. See page .
The engine can be severely damaged
if this indicator flashes or stays on
when the engine is running. For
more information, see page .
If this indicator comes on when the
engine is running, the battery is not
being charged. For more information,
see page .
If either of you do not fasten your
seat belt while driving, the beeper
will sound and the indicator will flash
again at regular intervals. For more
information, see page .
If your front passenger does not
fasten their seat belt, the indicator
comes on about 6 seconds after the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
(II) position.
This indicator comes on when you
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position. It reminds you and your
passengers to fasten your seat belts.
A beeper also sounds if you have not
fastened your seat belt.
If you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position before fastening
your seat belt, the beeper sounds
and the indicator flashes. If you do
notfastenyourseatbeltbeforethe
beeper stops, the indicator stops
flashing but remains on.
If you continue driving without
fastening your seat belt, the beeper
sounds and the indicator flashes
again at regular intervals.
21
277
276
276
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp
Low Oil Pressure
Indicator
Charging System
Indicator
Seat Belt Reminder
Indicator
Instrument Panel Indicators
62
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position, and when the ignition
switch is turned to the START (III)
position. If it comes on at any other
time, there is a problem with the
ABS. If this happens, have your
vehicle checked at a dealer. With
this on, your vehicle still has normal
braking ability but no anti-lock
brakes. For more information, see
page .
This indicator has two functions:
Itcomesonwhenyouturnthe
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. It is a reminder to check
the parking brake. A beeper
sounds if you drive with the
parking brake not fully released.
Driving with the parking brake not
fully released can damage the
brakes and tires.
If it stays on after you have fully
released the parking brake while
the engine is running, or if it
comes on while driving, there
could be a problem with the brake
system. For more information, see
page .
This indicator comes on briefly when
you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position. If it comes on at
any other time, it indicates a
potential problem with your front
airbags. This indicator will also alert
you to a potential problem with your
side airbags, passenger’s side airbag
automatic cutoff system, side curtain
airbags, automatic seat belt
tensioners, driver’s seat position
sensor, or the front passenger’s seat
weight sensors. For more
information, see page .
This indicator comes on when you
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position. If it comes on at any
other time, it indicates that the
passenger’s side airbag has
automatically shut off. For more
information, see page .
1.
2.
33
34
278
210
Instrument Panel Indicators
Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS) Indicator
Parking Brake and Brake System
Indicator
Supplemental Restraint
System Indicator
Side Airbag Off
Indicator
Instruments and Controls
63
U.S. Canada
U.S. Canada
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This indicator has three functions:
It comes on as a reminder that you
have turned off the vehicle
stability assist (VSA) system.
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. For more information, see
page .
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
This indicator also blinks several
times when you turn the ignition
switch from the ON (II) position to
the ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0)
position.
This indicator comes on for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position. It will
then go off if you have inserted a
properly-coded ignition key. If it is
not a properly-coded key, the
indicator will blink, and the engine
will not start (see page ).
Ifitcomesonandstaysonatany
other time, or if it does not come on
when you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, there is a
problem with the VSA system. Take
your vehicle to a dealer to have it
checked. Without VSA, your vehicle
still has normal driving ability, but
will not have VSA traction and
stability enhancement. See page
for more information on the
VSA system.
It flashes when VSA is active (see
page ).
It comes on along with the VSA
system indicator if there is a
problem with the VSA system.
1.
2.
3.
211
211
79
211
Instrument Panel Indicators
VSA Activation IndicatorVehicle Stability Assist
(VSA) System Indicator
Immobilizer System
Indicator
64
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
The appropriate tire indicator will
come on along with the low tire
pressure indicator if a tire is
extremely underinflated or has
suddenly lost pressure. See
for what to
do if this indicator comes on.
If this indicator comes on and stays
on at any other time, or if it does not
come on when you turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position, there
is a problem with the TPMS. With
this indicator on, the low tire
pressure indicator and the tire
pressure monitor will not come on
when a tire loses pressure. Take the
vehicle to your dealer to have the
system checked.
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
If it comes on while driving, it
indicates that one or more of your
vehicle’s tires are extremely low on
pressure.
If this happens, pull to the side of the
road when it is safe, check which tire
has lost the pressure on the tire
pressure monitor, and determine the
cause. If it is because of a flat tire,
replace the flat tire with the compact
spare (see page ), and have the
flat tire repaired as soon as possible.
If two or more tires are underinflated,
call a professional towing service
(see page ). Refer to page
for more information.
266
279
205
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) Indicator
Low Tire Pressure
Indicator
Tire Pressure Monitor
Low
Tire Pressure Indicator
Instrument Panel Indicators
Instruments and Controls
65
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If a brake light does not work, the
indicator comes on
when you push the brake pedal with
the ignition switch in the ON (II)
position.
The left or right turn signal indicator
blinks when you signal a lane change
or turn. If an indicator does not blink
or blinks rapidly, it usually means
one of the turn signal bulbs is
burned out (see pages and ).
Replace the bulb as soon as possible,
since other drivers cannot see that
you are signaling.
The appropriate indicator comes on
in this display if the tailgate or any
door is not closed tightly.
All of the indicators in the monitor
display come on for a few seconds
when you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position.
When you press the hazard warning
button, both turn signal indicators
and all turn signals on the outside of
the vehicle flash.
A burned out brake light is a hazard
when drivers behind you cannot tell
you are braking. Replace the bulb as
soon as possible (see page ).
249 252
252
Turn Signal and
Hazard Warning
Indicators
Brake Lamp Indicator Door and Tailgate Open Monitor
Instrument Panel Indicators
66
BRAKE LAMP
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Canadian models only
Canadian models only
Canadian models only
This indicator comes on when you
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position with the headlight
switch off and the parking brake set.
It should go off when you turn on the
headlights or release the parking
brake. If it comes on at any other
time, it means there is a problem
withtheDRL.Theremayalsobea
problem with the high beam
headlights.
This indicator comes on with the
high beam headlights. For more
information, see page .
This indicator comes on when you
set the cruise control. See page
for information on operating the
cruise control.
This indicator comes on as a
reminder that you must refuel soon.
This indicator comes on when the
washer fluid level is low. Add washer
fluid when you see this indicator
(see page ).
This indicator also comes on with
reduced brightness when the
daytime running lights (DRL) are on
(see page ).
When the indicator comes on, there
is about 1.8 U.S. gal (7.0
)offuel
remaining in the tank before the
needle reaches E. There is a small
reserve of fuel remaining in the tank
when the needle does reach E.
175
75
76
243
High Beam IndicatorDaytime Running Lights
Indicator
Cruise Control Indicator
Low Fuel Indicator
Washer Level Indicator
Instrument Panel Indicators
Instruments and Controls
67
LOW FUEL INDICATOR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This indicator monitors the
temperature of the automatic
transmission fluid. It should come on
for a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. If it comes on while driving,
it means the transmission fluid
temperature is too high. Pull to the
side of the road when it is safe, shift
to Park, and let the engine idle until
the indicator goes out.
If the indicator blinks while driving,
the VTM-4 fluid temperature is too
high. Pull to the side of the road
when it is safe, shift to Park, and let
the engine idle until the indicator
goes out.
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. If it comes on at any other
time, there is a problem in the 4WD
system. Take the vehicle to your
dealer to have it checked.
While the engine is operating in its
most economical range, this
indicator may come on and stay on.
4WD models only 4WD models only 2WD models only
A/T Temperature
Indicator
VTM-4 Indicator Fuel Economy Indicator
Instrument Panel Indicators
68
Continuing to drive with the A/T
temperature indicator on may cause
serious damage to the transmission.
Continuing to drive with the VTM-4
indicator blinking may cause serious
damage to the system.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This indicator reminds you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance. The
maintenance main items and sub
items will be displayed in the
information display. See page for
more information on the
maintenance minder.
This indicator goes off when your
dealer resets it after completing the
required maintenance service.
This indicator reminds you that the
exterior lights are on. It comes on
when the light switch is in either the
or position. If you turn the
ignition switch to the ACCESSORY
(I) or LOCK (0) position without
turning off the light switch, this
indicator will stay on. A reminder
chime will also sound when you open
the driver’s door.
This indicator comes on when you
turn on the fog lights. For more
information, see page .
229
75
On EX and EX-L models
Instrument Panel Indicators
Lights On Indicator Fog Light Indicator Maintenance Minder
Indicator
Instruments and Controls
69
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Each trip meter works independently,
so you can keep track of two
different distances.
The odometer shows the total
distance your vehicle has been
driven. It measures miles in U.S.
models and kilometers in Canadian
models. It is illegal under U.S.
federal law and Canadian provincial
regulations to disconnect, reset, or
alter the odometer with the intent to
change the number of miles or
kilometers indicated.
This meter shows the number of
miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)
driven since you last reset it.
This shows how much fuel you have.
It may show slightly more or less
than the actual amount. The needle
returns to the bottom after you turn
off the ignition.
To reset a trip meter, display it, and
then press and hold the Select/Reset
knob until the number resets to ‘‘0.0’’.
There are two trip meters: Trip A
and Trip B. Switch between these
displays and the outside temperature
display (except LX models) by
pressing the Select/Reset knob
repeatedly.
Trip Meter
Odometer
Fuel Gauge
Gauges
70
TACHOMETER
SPEEDOMETER FUEL GAUGE TEMPERATURE
GAUGE
TRIP METER
INFORMATION DISPLAY
TRIP METER
SELECT/RESET
KNOB
Avoid driving with an extremely low
fuel level. Running out of fuel could
cause the engine to misfire, damaging
the catalytic converter.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
±±
−−
−−−
−−−
This shows the temperature of the
engine’s coolant. During normal
operation, the pointer should rise
from the bottom white mark to about
the middle white mark. In severe
driving conditions, such as very hot
weather or a long period of uphill
driving, the pointer may rise to the
upper white mark. If it reaches the
red (Hot) mark, pull safely to the
side of the road. Turn to page for
instructions and precautions on
checking the engine’s cooling
system.
NOTE: The temperature must be
stabilized before doing this
procedure.
This indicator displays the outside
temperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.
models) or Centigrade (Canadian
models). To see the outside
temperature, press and release the
Select/Reset knob until the
temperature is displayed.
If the outside temperature is
incorrectly displayed, you can adjust
it up to 5°F in U.S. models ( 3°C
in Canadian models) warmer or
cooler.
Select the outside temperature
indicator, then press the Select/
Reset knob for 10 seconds. The
following sequence will appear for 1
secondeach:0,1,2,3,4,5, 5, 4,
3, 2, 1, 0 (U.S.) or 0, 1, 2, 3,
3, 2, 1, 0 (Canada).
In certain weather conditions,
temperature readings near freezing
(32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice is
forming on the road surface.
When the temperature reaches the
desired value, release the Select/
Reset knob. You should see the new
outside temperature displayed.
The temperature sensor is in the
front bumper. Therefore, the
temperature reading can be affected
by heat reflection from the road
surface, engine heat, and the
exhaust from surrounding traffic.
This can cause an incorrect
temperature reading when your
speed is under 19 mph (30 km/h).
The sensor delays the display update
until it reaches the correct outside
temperature. This may take several
minutes.
242
On EX and EX-L models
Temperature Gauge Outside Temperature Indicator
Gauges
Instruments and Controls
71
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The information display in the
instrument panel shows you the
engine oil life and maintenance
service items when the ignition
switch is in the ON (II) position. This
information helps to keep you aware
of the periodic maintenance your
vehicle needs for continued trouble-
free driving. Refer to page for
more information.
Your vehicle’s on board diagnostic
system will detect a loose or missing
fuel fill cap as an evaporative system
leak. The first time a leak is detected
a ‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ message
appears on the information display.
Turn the engine off, and confirm the
fuel fill cap is installed. If it is, loosen
it, then retighten it until it clicks at
least once. The message should go
off after several days of normal
driving once you tighten or replace
the fuel fill cap. To scroll to another
display, press the select/reset knob.
The ‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ message
will appear each time you restart the
engine until the system turns the
message off.
If the system still detects a leak in
the vehicle’s evaporative emissions
system, the malfunction indicator
lamp (MIL) comes on. If the fuel fill
cap was not already tightened, turn
the engine off, and check or
retighten the fuel fill cap until it
clicks at least once. The MIL should
go off after several days of normal
driving once the cap is tightened or
replaced. If the MIL does not go off,
have your vehicle inspected by a
dealer. For more information, see
page .
229
277
Gauges
Maintenance Minder DisplayCheck Fuel Cap Message
72
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊
＊ If equipped.
To use the horn, press the pad around the ‘‘H’’ logo.:
1:
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
Instruments and Controls
73
LIGHT CONTROL
SWITCH
HAZARD WARNING BUTTON
WINDSHIELD WIPERS/
WASHERS
VSA OFF SWITCH
STEERING WHEEL
ADJUSTMENT
PASSENGER AIRBAG
OFF INDICATOR
(P.96)
(P.102)
(P.212)
CRUISE CONTROL
MASTER BUTTON
(P.175)
REMOTE AUDIO
CONTROLS
(P.138)
(P.78)
CRUISE CONTROL
BUTTONS
(P.175)
HORN
(P.77)
VTM-4 LOCK
(P.204)
(P.35)
(P.77)
(P.74)
MOONROOF BUTTONS
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER
(P.75)
HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNAL/
FOG LIGHTS
1
1
1
1
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
MIST
OFF
INT Intermittent
LO Low speed
HI High speed
Windshield washers
Push the right lever up or down to
select a position.
The wipers run at high
speed until you release the lever.
Rotate the switch clockwise to
turn the rear window wiper ON.
Hold past ON to spray the rear
window washer.
OFF
Hold past OFF to spray the rear
window washer and turn the rear
window wiper on for a short
interval.
The wipers run at low speed.
The wipers are not activated.
The length of the wiper
interval is varied automatically
according to the vehicle’s speed.
Vary the delay by turning the INT
TIME ring. If you turn it to the
shortest delay, the wiper speed
will increase to low speed
operation when the vehicle speed
exceeds 12 mph (20 km/h).
The wipers run at high speed.
Pull the
wiper control lever toward you,
andholdit.Thewashersspray
until you release the lever. The
wipers run at low speed, then
complete one more sweep after
you release the lever.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Rear Window Wiper and Washer
MIST
LO
OFF
INT
HI
Windshield Washers
Windshield Wipers and Washers
74
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
Turn signal
Off
Parking and indicator lights
Headlights
High beams
Flashhighbeams
Fog lights off (if equipped)
Fog lights on (if equipped)
Push down on the
lever to signal a left turn and up to
signal a right turn. To signal a lane
change, push lightly on the lever,
and hold it. The lever will return to
center when you release it or
complete a turn.
Turning the switch
on the left lever to the position
turns on the parking lights, taillights,
instrument panel lights, side-marker
lights, and rear license plate lights.
Turning the switch to the
position turns on the
headlights. If you leave the lights on
with the ignition switch in the
ACCESSORY (I) or the LOCK (0)
position, you will hear a reminder
chime when you open the driver’s
door.
Push the lever
forward until you hear a click. The
high beam indicator will come on
(see page ). Pull the lever back to
return to the low beams.
You can use the fog lights only when
the headlights are on low beam.
Turn the fog lights on and off by
turning the switch next to the
headlight switch.
To flash the high beams, pull the
lever back lightly, then release it.
The high beams will stay on as long
as you hold the lever back.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
67
On EX and EX-L models
Turn Signal and Headlights
Turn Signal
Headlights
High Beams
Fog Lights
Instruments and Controls
75
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The knob on the instrument panel
controls the brightness of the instru-
ment panel lights. Turn the knob to
adjust the brightness.
The automatic lighting off feature
turns off the headlights, all other
exterior lights, and the instrument
panel lights within 15 seconds of
removing the key from the ignition
switch and closing the driver’s door.
The lights will turn on again when
you unlock or open the driver’s door.
If you unlock the door, but do not
open it within 15 seconds, the lights
go off. With the driver’s door open,
you will hear a lights-on reminder
chime.
With the headlight switch off, the
high beam headlights come on with
reduced brightness when you turn
the ignition switch to the ON (II)
position and release the parking
brake. They remain on until you turn
the ignition switch off, even if you
set the parking brake.
The headlights revert to normal
operation when you turn them on
with the switch.
This feature activates if you leave
the headlight switch in the or
position, remove the key, then
open and close the driver’s door.
If you remove the key from the
ignition switch with the headlight
switch on, but do not open the door,
the lights will turn off after 10
minutes.
On EX and EX-L models
Instrument Panel BrightnessAutomatic Lighting Off Feature
(Canadian Models)
Daytime Running Lights
Headlights, Instrument Panel Brightness
76
INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL KNOB
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The rear window defogger will clear
fog, frost, and thin ice from the
window. Push the defogger button to
turn it on and off. The indicator
above the button comes on to show
the defogger is on. If you do not turn
it off, the defogger will shut itself off
after about 15 minutes. It also shuts
off when you turn off the ignition
switch. You have to turn the
defogger on again when you restart
the vehicle.
The defogger wires on the inside of
the rear window can be accidentally
damaged. When cleaning the glass,
always wipe side-to-side.
Make sure the rear window is clear
and you have good visibility before
starting to drive.
Pushtheredbuttontoturnonthe
hazard warning lights (four-way
flashers). This causes all four
outside turn signals and both turn
indicators in the instrument panel to
flash. Use the hazard warning lights
if you need to park in a dangerous
area near heavy traffic, or if your
vehicle is disabled.
Hazard Warning Button Rear Window Defogger
Hazard Warning Button, Rear Window Defogger
Instruments and Controls
77
HAZARD WARNING BUTTON
EX and EX-L models
LX models
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Push the lever under the steering
column all the way down.
Move the steering wheel so it
points to your chest, not toward
your face. Make sure you can see
the instrument panel gauges and
indicators.
Make sure you have securely
locked the steering wheel in place
by trying to move it up and down.
Make any steering wheel adjustment
before you start driving.
Push the lever up to lock the
steering wheel in position.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Steering Wheel Adjustment
78
Adjusting the steering wheel
position while driving may
cause you to lose control of the
vehicle and be seriously injured
inacrash.
Adjust the steering wheel only
when the vehicle is stopped.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The master key fits all the locks on
your vehicle. The valet key works
only in the ignition and the door
locks. You can keep the glove box
locked when you leave your vehicle
and the valet key at a parking facility.
These keys contain electronic
circuits that are activated by the
immobilizer system. They will not
work to start the engine if the
circuits are damaged.
Protect the keys from direct
sunlight, high temperature, and
high humidity.
Donotdropthekeysorsetheavy
objects on them.
Keep the keys away from liquids.
If they get wet, dry them
immediately with a soft cloth.
Youshouldhavereceivedakey
number tag with your keys. You will
need this key number if you ever
have to get a lost key replaced. Use
only Honda-approved key blanks.
CONTINUED
Immobilizer System
Keys and Locks, Immobilizer System
Instruments and Controls
79
VALET KEY
(GRAY)
KEY NUMBER
TAG
MASTER KEYS WITH
REMOTE TRANSMITTER
Main Menu
Table of Contents
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
The immobilizer system protects
your vehicle from theft. If an
improperly-coded key (or other
device) is used, the engine will not
start.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, the immobilizer
system indicator should come on for
a few seconds, then go off. If the
indicator starts to blink, it means the
system does not recognize the
coding of the key. Turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK (0) position,
remove the key, reinsert it, and turn
the ignition switch to the ON (II)
position again.
The system may not recognize your
key’s coding if another immobilizer
key or other metal object (i.e. key
fob) is near the ignition switch when
you insert the key.
If the system repeatedly does not
recognize the coding of your key,
contact your dealer.
Do not attempt to alter this system
or add other devices to it. Electrical
problems could result that may make
your vehicle undrivable.
If you have lost your key and you
cannot start the engine, contact your
dealer.
Immobilizer System
80
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
The ignition switch has four
positions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY
(I), ON (II), and START (III).
You can insert or
remove the key only in this position.
To turn the key, the shift lever must
be in Park, and you must push the
key in slightly.
You can
operate the audio system and the
accessory power sockets in this
position.
If the front wheels are turned, the
anti-theft lock may make it difficult
to turn the key. Firmly turn the
steering wheel to the left or right as
you turn the key.
Use this position
only to start the engine. The switch
returns to the ON (II) position when
you let go of the key.
You will hear a reminder beeper if
you leave the key in the LOCK (0) or
the ACCESSORY (I) position and
open the driver’s door. Remove the
key to turn off the beeper.
TheshiftlevermustbeinPark
before you can remove the key from
the ignition switch.
This is the normal key
position when driving. Several of the
indicators on the instrument panel
come on as a test when you turn the
ignition switch from the
ACCESSORY (I) to the ON (II)
position.LOCK (0)
ACCESSORY (I)
START (III)
ON (II)
Ignition Switch
Instruments and Controls
81
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To lock the doors and the tailgate,
press the master door lock switch on
either front door, press the lock tab
down on the driver’s door, or use the
keyontheoutsidelockonthedriver’s
door.
Pressing up on either master door
lock switch will unlock all of the
doors and the tailgate.
The lock tab on any door locks and
unlocks that door. To unlock the
driver’s door from the outside, turn
the key and release it. If you turn
and hold it, all doors and the tailgate
unlock.
Keep the tailgate and the hatch glass
closed at all times while driving to
avoid damaging the tailgate and the
hatch glass, and to prevent exhaust
gas from getting into the interior.
See on
page .
With the driver’s door open and the
key in the ignition, both master door
lock switches are disabled. They are
not disabled if the driver’s door is
closed. Pushing the switch down on
the open passenger’s door will lock
all doors and the tailgate. To open the tailgate, pull the handle,
then lift up. To close the tailgate, use
the inner handle to pull it down, then
press down on the back edge.
57
Power Door Locks Tailgate
Carbon Monoxide Hazard
Door Locks
Lockout Prevention
82
MASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH
LOCK TAB
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−The childproof door locks are
designed to prevent children seated
in the rear from accidentally opening
the rear doors. Each rear door has a
lock lever near the edge. With the
lever in the LOCK position, the door
cannot be opened from inside
regardless of the position of the lock
tab. To open the door, pull the lock
tab up, and use the outside door
handle.
Pressthisbuttononce
to unlock the driver’s door. Push it
twice to unlock the other doors and
the tailgate. Some exterior lights will
flash twice each time you press the
button.
Press this button once to
lock all doors and the tailgate. Some
exterior and interior lights will flash.
When you push LOCK twice within 5
seconds, you will hear a beep to
verify that the security system has
set. You cannot lock it if any door is
not fully closed or the key is in the
ignition switch.
When you press the UNLOCK
button, the front and rear individual
map lights, depending on the interior
light control switch position, will
come on (see page ). If you do
not open any door, the lights stay on
for about 30 seconds, then go out. If
you relock the doors and the tailgate
with the remote transmitter before
30 seconds have elapsed, the lights
will go off immediately.
If you do not open any door within 30
seconds, the doors automatically
relock and the security system sets.
102
CONTINUED
Childproof Door Locks UNLOCK
LOCK
Remote Transmitter
Childproof Door Locks, Remote Transmitter
Instruments and Controls
83
PANIC
BUTTON
LOCK
BUTTON
UNLOCK
BUTTON
LED
LOCK LEVER
Unlock
Lock
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
To replace the battery:
Remove the screw at the base of
the transmitter with a small
Phillips-head screwdriver.
Separate the transmitter by prying
its middle seam with your
fingernail.
Battery type: CR1616
If it takes several pushes on the
button to lock or unlock the doors,
replace the battery as soon as
possible.
Pressthisbuttonfor
about 1 second to attract attention;
thehornwillsoundandtheexterior
lights will flash for about 30 seconds.
To cancel panic mode, press any
other button on the remote
transmitter, or turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position.
Avoid dropping or throwing the
transmitter.
If you lose a transmitter, the
replacement needs to be
reprogrammed by your dealer.
Do not immerse the transmitter in
any liquid.
Protect the transmitter from
extreme temperature.
1.
2.
Replacing the Transmitter Battery
Remote Transmitter Care
PANIC
Remote Transmitter
84
SCREW
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＋
Inside the transmitter, separate
the inner cover from the keypad
by releasing the two tabs on the
cover.
Remove the old battery from the
back of the inner cover, and insert
a new battery into the back of the
cover with the side facing down.
An improperly disposed of battery
can hurt the environment.
Always confirm local regulations for
battery disposal.
Install the parts in reverse order.
3.
4.
5.
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Remote Transmitter
Instruments and Controls
85
BATTERY
TAB
Main Menu
Table of Contents
In HI, the heater turns off when the
seat gets warm, and turns back on
after the seat’s temperature drops.
In LO, the heater runs continuously.
It does not cycle with temperature
changes.
Follow these precautions whenever
you use the seat heaters:
Use the HI setting only to heat the
seats quickly, because it draws
large amounts of current from the
battery.Push the top of the switch, HI, to
rapidly heat up the seat. After the
seat reaches a comfortable
temperature, select LO by pushing
the bottom of the switch. This will
keep the seat warm.
If the engine is left idling for an
extended period, do not use the
seat heaters, even on the LO
setting. It can weaken the battery,
causing hard starting.
Both front seats are equipped with
seat heaters. Because of the sensors
for the side airbag system, there is
no heater in the passenger’s seat-
back. The ignition switch must be
ON (II) to use the heaters.
If equipped
Seat Heaters
86
SEAT HEATER BUTTONS
SEAT HEATER BUTTONS
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−See pages for important safety
information and warnings about how to
properly position the seats and seat-
backs.
13 14
On EX and EX-L models
Moving the long horizontal switch
adjusts the seat bottom in several
directions. The seat bottom adjusts
in the direction you move the switch.
The short vertical switch adjusts the
seat-back angle.
The controls for the adjustable
driver’s power seat are on the
outside edge of the seat bottom. You
can adjust the power seat with the
ignition switch in any position. Make
all seat adjustments before you start
driving.
Adjusts the seat-back
angle forward or
backward.
Moves the seat
forward and backward.
Moves the front of the
seat up or down and
the rear of the seat up
or down.
Raises or lowers the
seat.
Seats
Power Seat Adjustments
Instruments and Controls
87
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To change the seat-back angle of the
front seat, pull up the lever on the
outside of the seat bottom.
To adjust the seat forward and
backward, pull up on the lever under
the front seat cushion. Then try to
movetheseattomakesureitis
locked into position.
To change the lumbar support, move
the lever on the right side of the
seat-back forward or backward.
Keep moving the lever forward or
backward until you find a suitable
position.
On EX and EX-L models
Seats
Manual Seat AdjustmentsDriver’s Lumbar Support
88
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The left and right halves can be
folded separately.
If you are folding the left half of
the seat, use the ignition key to
release the center seat belt from
thedetachableanchor(seepage
).
Lower the head restraint to its
lowest position.
Pull up the handle on the outside
of the seat-back.
Fold the seat-back forward.
To change the angle of the seats in
the second row seat-backs, pull up
the handle on the seat-back. Moving
the short vertical switch forward or
backward adjusts the seat back in
those directions.
To adjust the seats forward and
backward, pull up on the lever under
the seat cushion. After moving the
seat, make sure it is locked into
position.
The height of your driver’s seat is
adjustable. Turn the front dial on the
outside of the seat cushion to raise
the front of the seat bottom, and turn
the rear dial to raise the rear.
Reverse this procedure to return the
seat to its upright position. Make
sure the seat is locked and secured
before driving.
2.
3.
1.
4.
18
On LX models
Seats
Folding the Second Row SeatsAdjusting the Second Row SeatsDriver’s Seat Height Adjustment
Instruments and Controls
89
SECOND
ROW SEAT
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Remove the head restraints by
pushing the release buttons and
pulling the restraints out.
Store the head restraints under
the cargo area floor. Insert the
shafts into the holes in the sides of
the storage compartment.
Pull on the handle on the back of the
seat-back, move the seat-back to the
desired position, and release the
handle. Let the seat-back latch in the
new position.
To get into the third row seats, pull
uptheleveronthesideofthe
passenger’s side second row seat-
back. The seat-back will tilt forward,
and the seat will slide forward.
Push the whole seat backwards until
fully latches. Make sure the seat is
locked and secured before driving.
1.
2.
Seats
Folding the Third Row SeatAdjusting the Third Row SeatThird Seat Access
90
THIRD ROW
SEAT
HANDLE
RELEASE LEVER
Main Menu
Table of Contents
They are most effective when you
adjust them so the back of the
occupant’s head rests against the
center of the restraint.
Your vehicle is equipped with head
restraints in all seating positions to
help protect you and your
passengers from whiplash and other
injuries.
Use the ignition key to release the
seat belt from the detachable
anchor (see page ).
Unlock the seat-back by pulling
the handle. Push the seat-back
forward.
Make sure you clip the small latch
plate of each outer shoulder belt to
the seat belt webbing whenever the
third seat is folded.
Reverse this procedure to return the
seat to its upright position.
Reinstall the head restraints,
reconnect the seat belts, and make
sure the seats are secured before
driving.
Make sure all items in the cargo area
are secured. Loose items can fly
forward and cause injury if you have
to brake hard (See
on page ).
The head restraints in the second
and third row seats adjust for height.
You need both hands to adjust the
restraint. To raise it, pull upward. To
lower it, push the release button
sideways, and push the restraint
down.
3.
4.
18
193
See page for important safety
information and a warning about how to
properly position the head restraints.
15
Seats
Head Restraints
Carrying Cargo
Instruments and Controls
91
RELEASE BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Keeptheinsideandoutsidemirrors
clean and adjusted for best visibility.
Be sure to adjust the mirrors before
you start driving.
The inside mirror has day and night
positions. The night position reduces
glare from headlights behind you.
Flip the tab on the bottom edge of
the mirror to select the day or night
position.
Therearviewmirrorhasacompass
function to indicate the vehicle’s
direction.
Refer to on page .177
If equipped
Mirrors
Compass
Mirrors
92
TAB
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The outside mirrors are heated to
remove fog and frost. With the
ignition switch in the ON (II)
position, turn on the heaters by
pressing the button. The indicator in
the button comes on as a reminder.
Press the button again to turn the
heaters off.
Push the appropriate edge of the
adjustment switch to move the
mirrorright,left,up,ordown.
Move the selector switch to L
(driver’s side) or R (passenger’s
side).
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.
When you finish, move the
selector switch to the center (off)
position. This turns the
adjustment switch off to keep your
settings.
1.
2.
3.
4.
If equipped
PowerMirrorHeatersAdjusting the Power Mirrors
Mirrors
Instruments and Controls
93
HEATED MIRROR BUTTON
ADJUSTMENT SWITCH
SELECTOR SWITCH
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position to raise or lower any
window. To open a window, push the
switchdownandholdit.Releasethe
switch when you want the window to
stop. Pull back on the switch and
hold it to close the window.
The windows will operate for up to
10 minutes after you turn off the
ignition switch. Opening either front
door cancels this function.
To open the driver’s
window fully, push the window
switch firmly down, then release it.
The window automatically goes
down all the way. To stop the
window from going all the way down,
pull back on the window switch
briefly.
To close the driver’s window fully,
pull back the window switch firmly,
then release it. The window
automatically goes all the way up. To
stop the window from going all the
way up, push down on the window
switch briefly.
To open or close the driver’s window
partially, push down or pull back on
the window switch lightly and hold it.
The window will stop when you
release the switch.
If the MAIN switch is OFF, the
passenger windows cannot be raised
or lowered. Keep the MAIN switch
offwhenyouhavechildreninthe
vehicle so they do not injure
themselves by operating the
windows unintentionally.
Power Windows
AUTO
94
DRIVER’S WINDOW
SWITCH
MAIN SWITCH
Closing a power window on
someone’s hands or fingers can
cause serious injury.
Make sure your passengers are
away from the windows before
closing them.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
− If the driver’s
window senses any obstacle while it
is closing automatically, it will
reverse direction, and then stop. To
close the window, remove the
obstacle, then use the window switch
again.
Auto reverse stops sensing when the
window is almost closed. You should
always check that all passengers and
objects are away from the window
before closing it.
Start the engine. Push down and
hold the driver’s window switch
until the window is fully open.
Pull and hold the driver’s window
switch to close the window
completely, then hold the switch
for about 2 seconds.
If the power windows do not operate
properly after resetting, have your
vehicle checked by your dealer.
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead, or the
driver’s window fuse is removed, the
AUTO function will be disabled. The
power window system needs to be
reset after reconnecting the battery
or installing the fuse.
1.
2.
Power Windows
AUTO REVERSE
Instruments and Controls
95
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The moonroof has two positions: it
can be tilted up in the back for
ventilation, or it can be slid back into
the roof. Use the switch under the
left dashboard vent to operate the
moonroof. The ignition switch must
be in the ON (II) position.
To tilt up the back of the moonroof,
press and hold the center button
. To close the moonroof, press
and hold the upper button . To
open the moonroof, press and hold
the lower button . Release the
button when the moonroof gets to
the desired position. Make sure
everyone’s hands are away from the
moonroof before opening or closing
it.
The moonroof has a key-off delay
function. You can still open and close
the moonroof for up to 10 minutes
after you turn off the ignition switch.
The key-off delay function cancels as
soon as you open either front door.
You must then turn the ignition
switch to the ON (II) position to
operate the moonroof.
If equipped
Moonroof
96
CLOSE BUTTON
OPEN BUTTON
TILT-UP
BUTTON
Opening or closing the
moonroof on someone’s hands
or fingers can cause serious
injury.
Make sure all hands and fingers
are clear of the moonroof
before opening or closing it.
If you try to open the moonroof in
below-freezing temperatures, or when
it is covered with snow or ice, you can
damage the moonroof panel or motor.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To apply the parking brake, push the
pedal down with your foot. To
release it, push on the pedal again.
The parking brake indicator on the
instrument panel should go out when
the parking brake is fully released
(see page ).63
Parking Brake
Instruments and Controls
97
PARKING BRAKE PEDAL
Driving the vehicle with the parking
brake applied can damage the rear
brakes and axles. A beeper will sound
if the vehicle is driven with the parking
brake on.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＊
＊
＊ If equipped.:
Interior Convenience Items
98
BEVERAGE HOLDERS
BEVERAGE HOLDERS
GLOVE BOX
ACCESSORY POWER SOCKETS
VANITY MIRROR
VANITY MIRROR
SUN VISOR
SUN VISOR
SUNGLASS HOLDER
WITH CONVERSATION
MIRROR
BEVERAGE HOLDERS
ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET
CONSOLE
COMPARTMENT
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Be careful when you are using the
beverage holders. A spilled liquid
that is very hot can scald you or your
passengers. Liquid can also spill
from the rear door pocket beverage
holders when you close the rear
doors. Use only resealable
containers in the door pockets. The
front beverage holders can be
installed under the slide.
Spilled liquids can damage the
upholstery, carpeting, and electrical
components in the interior.
Open the glove box by pulling the
bottom of the handle. Close it with a
firm push. Lock or unlock the glove
box with the master key.
To open the console compartment,
pull up on the lever, and lift the lid.
Pivot the door of the console forward
and you can store a cellular phone, a
small notepad, and business cards in
it.
The glove box light comes on when
the parking lights are on.
Interior Convenience Items
Beverage Holders Console Compartment Glove Box
Instruments and Controls
99
An open glove box can cause
serious injury to your passenger
inacrash,evenifthe
passenger is wearing the seat
belt.
Always keep the glove box
closed while driving.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The sunglasses holder uses a convex
mirror for its bottom panel. You can
see all the vehicle passengers in this
mirror. To use the mirror, open the
sunglasses holder fully, push it to the
first detent, and release it.
You may also store small items in
thisholder.Makesuretheyare
small enough to let the holder close
and latch, and that they are not
heavy enough to cause the holder to
pop open while driving.
To open the sunglasses holder, push
on the front edge. Make sure the
holder is closed while you are driving.
Some larger styles of sunglasses
may not fit in the holder.
On EX-L models
Interior Convenience Items
Sunglasses Holder Conversation Mirror
100
Push
SUNGLASSES HOLDER
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Make sure you put the sun visor
back in place when you are getting
into or out of the vehicle. Do not use
the extended sun visor over the rear
view mirror.
None of the sockets will power an
automotive type cigarette lighter
element. When both sockets are
being used, the combined power
rating of the accessories should be
120 watts or less (10 amps).
The light comes on when you pull up
the cover.
Whenusingthesunvisorforthe
side window, remove the support rod
from the clip and swing it out. Slide
the extension out to get more
coverage on the side window.
To use the vanity mirror on the back
of the sun visor, pull up the cover.
The vanity mirror light will not come
on if the sun visor is slid outward.
Each socket is intended to supply
power for 12 volt DC accessories
that are rated 120 watts or less (10
amps).
Sun Visor Accessory Power SocketsVanity Mirror
Interior Convenience Items
Instruments and Controls
101
SUN VISOR
EXTENSION
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Always run the engine when you use
the AC Power Outlet.
The maximum capacity for this
power outlet is 115 volt AC at 100
watts or less. If you use an appliance
which requires more than 100 watts,
it automatically stops supplying the
power. If this happens, turn the
ignition switch off and turn it on
again.
The AC power outlet is not
designed for electric appliances
which require high initial peak
wattage such as cathode-ray tube
type televisions, refrigerators,
electric pumps, etc. It is also not
suitable for devices that process
precise data such as medical
equipment or measuring instruments.
Any appliances that require an
extremely stable power supply such
as microcomputer-controlled electric
blankets, touch sensor lamps, etc.,
should not be connected to this
outlet.
ON
All the individual map lights come
onandstayonaslongasthe
switch remains in the ON position.
The individual map lights in the
front can be turned on and off with
the switches next to the lights.
None of the lights come on when a
door or the tailgate is opened.
There is a 115 volt AC power outlet
in the console compartment. To use
the AC power outlet, open the
console compartment lid and open
the outlet cover. Insert the plug into
the receptacle slightly, turn it 90°
clockwise, then push in the plug all
the way.
When this switch is in the position:
If equipped
When the switch is in the OFF position:
Interior Convenience Items, Interior Lights
AC Power Outlet Light Control Switch
102
NOTE:
DOOR
ACTIVATED
POSITION
OFF
ON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The individual map lights in the
second and third rows cannot be
turned on.
Door
Activated
The courtesy light between the map
lights comes on when you turn the
parking lights on. To adjust its
brightness, turn the Select/Reset
knob on the instrument panel.
The individual map lights come on
whenanydoororthetailgateis
opened, or when the remote
transmitter is used to unlock the
doors.
The individual map lights in the
second and third rows can be
turned on and off by pressing the
lens.
The tailgate light comes on when
you open the tailgate if the light
switch is in the ON position.
The lights go out about 6 seconds
after all the doors and the tailgate
are closed. With any door or the
tailgate left open, the lights stay
on about 3 minutes, then go out.
The light in the tailgate has an on-off
switch to control if the light comes
on when the tailgate is opened.
The courtesy lights in the front
doors and around the ignition switch
come on when you open any door.
After you close the door, the ignition
switch light stays on for several
seconds.
Turn on the front and rear individual
map lights by pushing the lens of
each light. Push the lens again to
turn it off. You can also operate
these lights with the light control
switch (see page ).102
When the switch is in the
position:
Interior Lights
Courtesy LightsIndividual Map Lights
Tailgate Light
Individual Interior Lights
Instruments and Controls
103
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Main Menu
The heating and air conditioning
system in your vehicle provides a
comfortable driving environment in
all weather conditions.
The standard audio system has
many features. This section
describes those features and how to
use them.
Your vehicle has an anti-theft audio
system that requires a code number
to enable it.
The security system helps to dis-
courage vandalism and theft of your
vehicle.
.............Vents, Heating, and A/C . 106
.......................Air Flow Buttons . 107
......Automatic Climate Control . 112
.........Using the Rear A/C Unit . 113
................................Audio System . 115
..........................Playing the Radio . 117
........................Radio Reception . 122
...Playing the XM Satellite Radio . 124
................................Playing a Disc . 130
........................Disc Changer . 131, 134
...................Protecting your Discs . 135
.......Disc Player Error Messages . 136
Disc Changer Error
...................................Messages . 137
................Remote Audio Controls . 138
.................Radio Theft Protection . 139
..........................Setting the Clock . 140
........Rear Entertainment System . 142
............................Security System . 174
...............................Cruise Control . 175
.........................................Compass . 177
.Rear View Camera and Monitor . 180
HomeLink Universal
................................Transceiver . 181
On EX and EX-L models
Features
Features
105
Main Menu
Vents, Heating, and A/C
106
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL DIAL
RECIRCULATION
BUTTON
FAN CONTROL
DIAL
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER BUTTON
MODE CONTROL DIAL
AIR CONDITIONING BUTTON
MODE BUTTON
FAN SPEED
INDICATOR
FAN CONTROL
BUTTONS
TEMPERATURE CONTROL DIAL
AUTO BUTTON
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER BUTTON
OFF BUTTON
RECIRCULATION
BUTTON
WINDSHIELD
DEFROST
BUTTON
AIR CONDITIONING BUTTON
TEMPERATURE
DISPLAY
REAR A/C
MANUAL BUTTON
LX MODEL
EX and EX-L MODEL
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Press the RR A/C MANUAL button
to adjust the temperature of the rear
passenger compartment
independently. See page for
information using the rear A/C unit.
When you turn the A/C off, the
system cannot regulate the inside
temperature if you set the dial below
the outside air temperature.
This button turns the air
conditioning on and off. On LX
models, the indicator in the button is
on when the A/C is on. On EX and
EX-L models, you will see A/C ON
or A/C OFF in the display.
The temperature setting is shown in
the display.
Turning this dial clockwise increases
the temperature of the airflow.
Select the fan speed by pressing the
fan control buttons ( or ).
The fan speed is shown in vertical
bars on the display.
Turn the dial clockwise to increase
the fan speed and airflow. Turn the
dial counterclockwise to decrease it.
On EX and EX-L models, see page
for information on automatic
climate control and semi-automatic
operation.
The climate control system can also
be operated by voice control. See the
Navi section in your quick start
guide for an overview of this system,
and the navigation system manual
for complete details.
112
113
On vehicles with navigation system
On LX models
On EX and EX-L models
On EX and EX-L models
On EX and EX-L models
On EX and EX-L models
Vents, Heating, and A/C
RR A/C MANUAL Button
Air Conditioning (A/C) Button
Temperature Control Dial
Fan Control
Voice Control System
Features
107
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Airflow is divided between
the floor vents and the defroster
vents at the base of the windshield.
Air flows from the defroster
vents at the base of the windshield.
When you select or ,
the system automatically switches to
fresh air mode and turns on the A/C.
In this case, you cannot turn the A/C
off.
When you select , the system
automatically switches to fresh air
mode and turns on the A/C.
When you select , the system
automatically switches to fresh air
mode and turns on the A/C.
This button turns the rear window
defogger off and on (see page ).
Use the mode control dial or button
to select the vents the air flows from.
Some air will flow from the
dashboard corner vents in all modes.
Each time you press the MODE
button, the display shows the mode
selected.
Air flows from the center
and corner vents in the dashboard.
Airflow is divided between
the vents in the dashboard and the
floor vents.
Air flows from the floor
vents.
When the indicator in the button is
on, air from the vehicle’s interior is
sent throughout the system again.
When the indicator is off, air is
brought in from the outside of the
vehicle (fresh air mode).
The outside air intakes for the
heating and cooling system are at
the base of the windshield. Keep this
area clear of leaves and other debris.
Thesystemshouldbeleftinfresh
air mode under almost all conditions.
Keeping the system in recirculation
mode, particularly with the A/C off,
can cause the windows to fog up.
Switch to recirculation mode when
driving through dusty or smoky
conditions, then return to fresh air
mode.
77
On EX and EX-L models
On EX and EX-L models
On LX models
Vents, Heating, and A/C
Rear Window Defogger Button
Mode Control
Recirculation Button
108
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Air conditioning places an extra load
on the engine. Watch the engine
coolant temperature gauge (see page
). If it moves near the red zone,
turn off the A/C until the gauge
reading returns to normal.
Turn on the A/C by pressing the
button. The indicator in the button
comesonwhenafanspeedis
selected (LX model), or the
display shows A/C ON (EX and
EX-L models).
Make sure the temperature is set
to maximum cool.
Select .
If the outside air is humid, select
recirculation mode. If the outside
air is dry, select fresh air mode.
Set the fan to the desired speed.
The system automatically
turns on the A/C and switches to
recirculation mode. Air flows from
the center and side vents in the
dashboard. In this mode, you cannot
turn off the A/C and also cannot
switch to fresh air mode.
When you switch to from
, the A/C stays on, and you
can turn it on and off manually.
When you switch to another mode,
the A/C returns to its original setting,
either on or off, as displayed by the
A/C indicator.
The flow-through ventilation system
draws in outside air, circulates it
through the interior, then discharges
it through vents near the tailgate.
Set the temperature to the lower
limit.
Make sure the A/C is off.
Select and fresh air mode.
Set the fan to the desired speed.
The heater uses engine coolant to
warm the air. If the engine is cold, it
will be several minutes before you
feel warm air coming from the
system.
Select and fresh air mode.
Set the fan to the desired speed.
Adjust the warmth of the air with
the temperature control dial.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.
2.
3.
5.
71
On LX models
Vents, Heating, and A/C
Using the A/CVentilationMAX A/C
Using the Heater
Features
109
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To remove fog from the inside of the
windows:
Set the fan to the desired speed, or
high for faster defrosting.
Select . The system
automatically switches to fresh air
mode and turns on the A/C. The
A/C indicator (LX model) or the
A/C ON indicator in the display
(EX and EX-L models) will not be
displayed if it was previously off.
Adjust the temperature control
dial so the airflow feels warm.
Select to help clear the
rear window.
Turn the fan on.
Turn on the air conditioning.
Select and fresh air mode.
Adjust the temperature control
dial to your preference.
This setting is suitable for all driving
conditions whenever the outside
temperature is above 32°F (0°C).
Air conditioning, as it cools, removes
moisture from the air. When used in
combination with the heater, it
makes the interior warm and dry and
can prevent the windows from
fogging up.
you can
cool it down more rapidly by partially
opening the windows, turning on the
A/C, and setting the fan to
maximum speed in fresh air mode.
The vehicle has two A/C
units, one is in the front, and the
other is in the rear. The LX units are
independently controlled. The EX
and EX-L units are controlled by the
front panel controls, unless the RR
A/C MANUAL button is selected.
To cool the interior with MAX A/C:
Set the fan to the desired speed.
Select MAX A/C.
The system automatically turns on
the A/C, selects , and
switches to recirculation mode.
Make sure the temperature is set
to maximum cool.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.
2.
3.
If the interior is very warm,
On LX models
To Defog and DefrostTo Dehumidify the Interior
Vents, Heating, and A/C
110
NOTE:
Main Menu
Table of Contents
When you switch to , from
or , the A/C stays on.
This helps prevent the windows from
rapidly fogging up when the air is
suddenly routed away from the
windshield. If you want to turn the
A/C off, press and release the A/C
button until the indicator in the
buttoncomesonandthengoesoff.
When you press again or the
MODE button, the A/C returns to its
original setting, either on or off, as
displayed by the A/C ON or A/C
OFF indicator. If the original setting
is A/C OFF, the system switches to
AUTO.
Select . The system
automatically switches to fresh air
mode and turns on the A/C. The
A/C indicator (LX model) or the
A/C ON indicator in the display
(EX and EX-L models) will not be
displayed if it was previously off.
Select .
Set the fan and temperature
controls to maximum level.
For your safety, make sure you have
a clear view through all the windows
before driving.
To clear the windows faster, you can
close the dashboard corner vents by
rotating the wheel below it. This will
send more warm air to the
windshield defroster vents.
Continuous use of the recirculation
mode can cause humidity to build up
inside the vehicle. Once the
windshield is clear, select the fresh
air mode to avoid fogging the
windows.
1.
2.
3.
On LX models
On EX and EX-L models
Vents, Heating, and A/C
To Remove Exterior Frost or Ice
From the Windows
Features
111
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
You can manually select various
functions of the climate control
system when it is in FULL AUTO.
All other features remain
automatically controlled. Making any
manual selection causes the word
FULL in the display to go out.
The automatic climate control
system adjusts the fan speed and
airflow levels to maintain the interior
temperature you select.
Press the AUTO button.
Set the desired temperature by
turning the temperature control
dial. You will see FULL AUTO in
the system’s display.
The system automatically selects the
proper mix of conditioned and/or
heated air that will, as quickly as
possible, raise or lower the interior
temperature to your preference.
When you set the temperature to its
lower limit ( ) or its upper limit
( ), the system runs at full cooling
or heating only. It does not regulate
the interior temperature.
In cold weather, the fan will not
come on automatically until the
heater starts to develop warm air.
When the
system is in FULL AUTO, the rear
A/C passenger control dial cannot
be used. Pressing the button disables
the FULL AUTO function.
Turning the fan control dial to the
off position shuts the system off.
If you press OFF, the climate control
system shuts off completely.
Keep the system completely off
for short periods only.
To keep stale air and mustiness
from collecting, you should have
the fan running at all times.
1.
2.
Rear A/C Control
On EX and EX-L models
On EX and EX-L models
On LX models
Semi-automatic OperationAutomatic Climate Control
To Turn Everything Off
Lo
Hi
Vents, Heating, and A/C
112
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
A passenger in the second row can
use the rear fan control dial to adjust
the amount of airflow to the rear
passenger compartment.
Press the RR A/C MANUAL button
to enable the rear temperature
control dial; a second row passenger
can now adjust the temperature in
the rear passenger compartment
with the rear temperature control
dial. OFF (center) The rear A/C unit
shuts off.
Cool Air Turn this dial
counterclockwise to increase the
airflow.
Warm Air Turn this dial clockwise
to increase the airflow.
When the RR A/C MANUAL button
is on, you can adjust the temperature
of the rear passenger compartment
manually from the second row seat.
When the RR A/C MANUAL button
is off, the temperature in the rear
passenger compartment is controlled
by the front passenger with front
control panel.
CONTINUED
On LX models
On EX and EX-L models
On LX models On EX and EX-L models
Using the Rear A/C Unit
Vents, Heating, and A/C
Features
113
COOL AIR
WARM AIR
REAR A/C MANUAL BUTTON
The rear climate control system
has upper and lower vents. The
system can direct airflow to either
the upper or lower vent. It cannot
direct airflow to both vents at the
same time.
All models
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
Theclimatecontrolsystemhastwo
sensors. A sunlight sensor is in the
top of the dashboard, and a
temperature sensor is next to the
steering column. Do not cover the
sensors or spill any liquid on them.
OFF (center) The rear A/C unit
shuts off.
Cool Air Turn this dial
counterclockwise to increase the
temperature.
Warm Air Turn this dial clockwise
to increase the temperature.
On EX and EX-L models
Sunlight and Temperature
Sensors
Vents, Heating, and A/C
114
SUNLIGHT SENSOR
TEMPERATURE SENSOR
COOL AIR WARM AIR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Some models may have one of the
audio systems described in this
section.
Read the appropriate pages in this
section for operation of the audio
systems installed in your models.
See page to for playing the
Radio.
See page to for playing the
XM
Satellite Radio.
See page to for playing a
Disc.
121117
124
130
129
137
CONTINUED
Only U.S. EX-L models
Audio System
Features
115
AM/FM/CD Audio System
(LX models)
AM/FM/CD Changer Audio System
(EX models)
On U.S. models On U.S. models
(EX models)
(EX-L models)
(EX-L models)
On Canadian models On Canadian models
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Audio System
116
On U.S. models
(EX-L models)
(EX-L models)
On Canadian models
AM/FM/CD Changer Audio System
with rear entertainment system
On U.S. models
On Canadian models
AM/FM/CD Changer Audio System with navigation system
(EX-L models)
(EX-L models)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Playing the Radio
Features
117
PRESET BUTTONS
SCAN BUTTON
AUTO SELECT BUTTON
STEREO INDICATOR
TUNE/MODE KNOB
AM/FM BUTTON
PWR/VOL KNOB
SEEK/SKIP BAR
PRESET BUTTONS
STEREO INDICATOR
TUNE/SOUND
KNOB
AM/FM BUTTON
AM BUTTON
FM BUTTON
PWR/VOL KNOB
SCAN BUTTON
SEEK
BUTTONS
AM BUTTON
AUTO SELECT BUTTON
AUTO SELECT BUTTON
PWR/VOL KNOB
Canadian
models
U.S. EX-L
models
AM/FM
BUTTON
SCAN BUTTON
SOUND KNOB
FM BUTTON
PRESET BUTTONS
SEEK
BUTTONS
EX and
Canadian
EX-L models
STEREO INDICATOR
TUNE KNOB
U.S. models
(LX models)
(EX and EX-L models) (EX-L models with rear entertainment system)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−＋
−
−
The ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)
position. Turn the system on by
pushingthePWR/VOLknoborthe
AM/FM button. (AM or FM button
on U.S. EX model and Canadian
model).
Adjust the volume by turning the
PWR/VOL knob.
The band and frequency that the
radio was last tuned to is displayed.
To change bands, press the AM/FM
button (AM or FM button). On the
FM band, ST will be displayed if the
stationisbroadcastinginstereo.
Stereo reproduction in AM is not
available.
Select the desired band, AM or
FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store
twelve stations.
If you do nothing, the system will
then scan for the next strong station
and play it for 10 seconds. When it
plays a station you want to listen to,
press the SCAN button again.
Each preset button
(1 6) can store one station on AM,
and two stations on FM.
Usethetune,seek,orscan
function to tune the radio to a
desired station.
Pick a preset number (1 6), and
hold it until you hear a beep.
Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a
total of six stations on AM and
twelve stations on FM.
The SEEK function
searches up and down from the
current frequency to find a station
with a strong signal. To activate it,
press the /( ) or /( )
side of the bar, then release it.
You can use any of five methods to
find radio stations on the selected
band: tune, seek, scan, the preset
buttons, and auto select.
The scan function samples
all stations with strong signals on the
selected band. To activate it, press
the SCAN button, then release it.
You will see SCAN in the display.
The system will scan for a station
with a strong signal. When it finds
one, it will stop and play that station
for about 10 seconds.
Use the TUNE knob to
tune the radio to a desired frequency.
Turn the knob right to tune to a
higher frequency, or left to tune to a
lower frequency.
1.
2.
3.
4.
To Play the Radio
To Select a Station
PRESETSEEK
SCAN
TUNE
Playing the Radio
118
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−−
−
If you are
traveling far from home and can no
longer receive your preset stations,
you can use the auto select feature to
find stations in the local area.
Use the TRE/BAS
modes to adjust the tone to your
liking.
You can use the instrument panel
brightness control knob to adjust the
illumination of the audio system (see
page ). The audio system
illuminates when the parking lights
are on, even if the system is turned
off.
These two
modes adjust the strength of the
sound coming from each speaker.
BAL adjusts the side-to-side strength,
while FAD adjusts the front-to-back
strength.
,pressthe
A. SEL (auto select) button. This
restores the presets you originally
set.
Press the A. SEL button. ‘‘A. SEL’’
flashes in the display, and the system
goes into scan mode for several
seconds. It stores the frequencies of
six AM and twelve FM stations in
the preset buttons.
You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed after
pressing a preset button if auto
select cannot find a strong station for
every preset button.
If you do not like the stations auto
select has stored, you can store
other frequencies on the preset
buttons as previously described.
Press the MODE or SOUND knob
repeatedly to display the Bass (BAS),
Treble (TRE), Fader (FAD), and
Balance (BAL) settings.
Eachmodeisshowninthedisplayas
it changes. Turn the TUNE/SOUND
knob to adjust the setting to your
liking. When the level reaches the
center, you will see ‘‘C’’ in the display.
The system will automatically return
the display to the selected audio
mode about 5 seconds after you stop
adjusting a mode.
76
To turn off auto select
AUTO SELECT
Audio System Lighting
Treble/Bass
Balance/Fader
Adjusting the Sound
Playing the Radio
Features
119
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
While you are listening to the radio,
you can change to another band by
pressing the AUDIO button next to
the navigation system screen, and
then touching the desired band icon
(FM1, FM2, or AM).
AUTO SELECT, SCAN, and SOUND
are adjustable from the navigation
screen. For an explanation of these
functions, see pages and .
Touch the
A.SEL icon to activate the auto select
function. You will see A.SEL flashing
on the display.
Touch the SCAN icon to
activate the scan function. You will
see SCAN on the display. Touch the
icon again to deactivate it.
In addition to the knobs, buttons, and
bars on the radio control panel, you
can operate some of the radio
controls on the navigation system
screen.
The audio system can also be
operated by voice control. See the
Navi section in your quick start
guide for an overview of this system,
and the navigation system manual
for complete details.
118 119
On vehicles with navigation system
On vehicles with navigation system
Playing the Radio
AUTO SELECT
SCAN
Operating the Radio on the
Navigation System Screen
Voice Control System
120
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
＋−
You can use the instrument panel
brightness control dial to adjust the
illumination of the audio system (see
page ). The audio system
illuminates when the parking lights
are on, even if the radio is off.
These modes adjust
the strength of the sound coming
from each speaker. Left/Right
balance adjusts the side-to-side
strength, while Front/Rear fader
adjusts the front-to-back strength.
To adjust the left/right balance,
touch the ‘‘L’’ or ‘‘R’’ icon. To adjust
the front/rear fader, touch the ‘‘FR’’
or ‘‘RR’’ icon.
To see the audio display when you
are finished adjusting the sound,
wait 5 seconds.To adjust the sound, push the
AUDIO button, then enter the sound
grid by touching the SOUND icon on
the display.
To adjust the treble
and bass, touch or on each side
of the treble or bass adjustment bar.
The adjustment bar shows you the
current setting.
76
Playing the Radio
Audio System Lighting
Left/Right Balance and Front/
Rear Fader
Treble/Bass
Adjusting the Sound
Features
121
AUDIO BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The radio can receive the complete
AM and FM bands.
Those bands cover these frequen-
cies:
AM band: 530 to 1,710 kHz
FM band: 87.7 to 107.9 MHz
How well the radio receives stations
is dependent on many factors, such
as the distance from the station’s
transmitter, nearby large objects,
and atmospheric conditions.
Driving very near the transmitter of
a station that is broadcasting on a
frequency close to the frequency of
the station you are listening to can
also affect your radio’s reception.
You may temporarily hear both
stations,orhearonlythestationyou
are close to.
Radio stations on the AM band are
assigned frequencies at least 10 kHz
apart (530, 540, 550). Stations on the
FM band are assigned frequencies at
least 0.2 MHz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).
Stations must use these exact
frequencies. It is fairly common for
stations to round-off the frequency in
their advertising, so your radio could
display a frequency of 100.9 even
though the announcer may identify
the station as ‘‘FM101.’’
A radio station’s signal gets weaker
as you get farther away from its
transmitter. If you are listening to an
AM station, you will notice the sound
volume becoming weaker, and the
stationdriftinginandout.Ifyouare
listening to an FM station, you will
see the stereo indicator flickering off
and on as the signal weakens.
Eventually, the stereo indicator will
go off and the sound will fade
completely as you get out of range of
the station’s signal.
Radio Frequencies Radio Reception
Radio Reception
122
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Radio signals, especially on the FM
band, are deflected by large objects
such as buildings and hills. Your
radio then receives both the direct
signal from the station’s transmitter,
and the deflected signal. This causes
the sound to distort or flutter. This is
a main cause of poor radio reception
in city driving.
Radio reception can be affected by
atmospheric conditions such as
thunderstorms, high humidity, and
even sunspots. You may be able to
receive a distant radio station one
day and not receive it the next day
because of a change in conditions.
Electrical interference from passing
vehicles and stationary sources can
cause temporary reception problems.
As required by the FCC:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
Radio Reception
Features
123
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Playing the XM Satellite Radio
124
PWR/VOL
KNOB
U.S. EX-L models
DISP/MODE BUTTON
CATEGORY BAR
PRESET BUTTONSSCAN BUTTON
PWR/VOL
KNOB
U.S. EX-L models with rear entertainment system
TUNE KNOB
PRESET BUTTONSSCAN BUTTON
TUNE KNOB
DISP/MODE BUTTON
CATEGORY BAR
XM BUTTON
XM BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
On the audio display, you will see the
selected CHANNEL (number),
CATEGORY, NAME (artist name),
and TITLE (music title).
Your audio system is capable of
receiving XM
Satellite Radio
anywhere in the United States,
except Hawaii and Alaska.
You may experience periods when
XM Radio does not transmit the
artist’s name and song title
information. If this happens, there is
nothing wrong with your system.
XM
is a registered trademark of
XM Satellite Radio, Inc.
XM radio receives signals from two
satellites to produce clear, high-
quality digital reception. It offers
many channels in several categories.
Along with a large selection of
different types of music, XM radio
allows you to view channel and
category selections in the display.
The navigation system screen also
shows all XM information when the
AUDIO button is pressed.
To switch between
channel mode and category mode,
press and hold the DISP/MODE
button until the mode changes.
In channel mode, you can select all
of the available channels. In category
mode, such as Jazz, Rock, Classical,
etc., you can select all of the
channels within that category.
Each time you press and release the
DISP/MODE button, the display
changes in the following sequence:
Channel name, channel number,
category, artist name, and music title.
To listen to XM radio, turn the
ignition switch to the ACCESSORY
(I) or the ON (II) position. Push the
PWR/VOL knob to turn on the audio
system, and press the ‘‘XM’’ button.
Adjust the volume by turning the
PWR/VOL knob. The last channel
you listened to will show in the
display.
You can also change to the XM radio
while you are listening to an FM
station, AM station, CD, etc., by
touching the XM1 or XM2 icon on
the audio display (navigation system
screen).
CONTINUED
U.S. EX and EX-L models only
Playing the XM Satellite Radio
Operating the XM Radio
MODE
Features
125
On vehicles with navigation system
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−−
＋
−
Pick a preset number (icon) you
want for that channel. Press and
hold the bar (icon) until you hear a
beep.
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store the
first six channels.
To store a channel:
Press the XM button. Either XM1
or XM2 will show in the display.
Press the XM button again or
touch the other XM icon (XM1 or
XM2) on the audio display. Store
the next six channels using steps 2
and 3.
In category mode, only channels
within that category can be selected.
In channel mode, all channels can be
selected.
Press either side of the CATEGORY
bar ( or ) to select another
category.
The scan function gives
you a sampling of all channels while
in the channel mode. In the category
mode, only the channels within that
category are scanned. To activate
scan, press the SCAN/RPT button or
touch the SCAN icon on the audio
display. The system plays each
channel in numerical order for a few
seconds, then selects the next
channel. When you hear a channel
you want to continue listening to,
press the button or touch the icon
again.
Youcanstoreupto12
preset channels using the six preset
buttons or preset icons on the audio
display. Each button stores one
channel from the XM1 band and one
channel from the XM2 band.
Use the TUNE knob, or the
CATEGORY or SCAN buttons to
tune to a desired channel. Once a channel is stored, press and
release the proper preset button
(icon) to tune to it.
Turn the TUNE knob left
or right to select channels. In the
category mode, you can only select
channels within that category.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Playing the XM Satellite Radio
SEEK/SKIP (CATEGORY)
SCAN
PresetTUNE
126
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
−
The encryption
code is being
updated. Wait
until the
encryption code is
fully updated.
Channels 0 and 1
should still work
normally.
The signal is
currently too
weak. Move the
vehicle to an area
away from tall
buildings, and
with an
unobstructed view
of the southern
horizon.
The selected channel
number does not exist or
isnotpartofyour
subscription, or this
channel has no artist or
title information at this
time.
The channel
currently selected is
no longer
broadcasting.
XM is loading the
audio or program
information.
There is a problem
with the XM
antenna. Please
consult your dealer.
Playing the XM Satellite Radio
XM Radio Display Messages
‘‘UPDATING’’
‘‘NO SIGNAL’’
‘‘----’’
‘‘OFF AIR’’
‘‘LOADING’’
‘‘ANTENNA’’
Features
127
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The XM satellites are in orbit over
the equator; therefore, objects south
of the vehicle may cause satellite
reception interruptions. To help
compensate for this, ground-based
repeaters are placed in major
metropolitan areas.
Satellite signals are more likely to be
blocked by tall buildings and
mountains the farther north you
travel from the equator. Carrying
large items on a roof rack can also
block the signal.
Playing the XM Satellite Radio
128
Signal may be blocked by
mountains or large obstacles to
the south.
Signal weaker in
these areas.
SATELLITE
GROUND
REPEATER
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Depending on where you drive, you
may experience reception problems.
Interference can be caused by any of
these conditions:
Driving on the north side of a
large commercial truck on an
east/west road.
Driving in tunnels.
Driving on a road beside a vertical
wall, steep cliff, or hill to the south
of you.
Driving on the lower level of a
multi-tiered road.
Driving on a single lane road
alongside dense trees taller than
50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.
After you’ve registered with XM
Radio, keep your audio system in the
satellite radio mode while you wait
for activation. This should take about
30 minutes.
Driving on the north side of an
east/west mountain road.
Large items carried on a roof rack.
There may be other geographic
situations that could affect XM radio
reception.
While waiting for activation, make
sure your vehicle remains in an open
area with good reception. Once your
audio system is activated, you’ll be
able to listen to XM radio broadcasts.
XM Radio will continue to send an
activation signal to your vehicle for
at least 12 hours from the activation
request. If the service has not been
activated after 36 hours, contact XM
Radio.
If your XM Radio service has expired
or you purchased your vehicle from
a previous owner, you can listen to a
sampling of the broadcasts available
on XM satellite radio. With the
ignition switch in the ACCESSORY
(I) or the ON (II) position, push the
PWR/VOL knob to turn on the audio
system and press the XM RADIO
button. A variety of music types and
styles will play.
If you decide to purchase XM
satellite radio service, contact XM
Radio at , or at
1-800-852-9696. You will need to give
them your radio I.D. number and
your credit card number. To get your
radio I.D. number, turn the TUNE
knob until ‘‘0’’ appears in the display.
Your I.D. will appear in the display.
As required by the FCC:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
www.xmradio.com
Receiving Satellite Radio Service
Playing the XM Satellite Radio
Features
129
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Playing a Disc
130
PWR/VOL KNOB
REPEAT INDICATOR
CD SLOT
CD EJECT
BUTTON
CD SLOT
PWR/VOL
KNOB
SEEK/SKIP BAR
RANDOM INDICATOR
CD BUTTON
CD EJECT
BUTTON
RANDOM BUTTON
RANDOM
BUTTON
REPEAT
BUTTON
REPEAT BUTTON
CD LOAD INDICATOR
LOAD
BUTTON
CD
BUTTON
PRESET BUTTONS
CD EJECT
BUTTON
CD SLOT
PWR/VOL
KNOB
RANDOM
BUTTON
REPEAT
BUTTON
CD LOAD INDICATOR
LOAD
BUTTON
CD
BUTTON
PRESET BUTTONS
SKIP BAR
SKIP BAR
(LX models)
(EX and EX-L models)
(EX-L models with rear entertainment system)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
To load or play CDs, the ignition
switch must be in the ACCESSORY
(I) or the ON(II) position.
You operate the CD player/CD
changer with the same controls used
for the radio. To select the CD
player/CD changer, press the CD
button. The number of the track
playing is shown in the display. With
the in-dash CD changer, the disc and
track numbers are displayed. The
system will continuously play a CD
until you change modes.
Insert a CD about halfway into the
CD slot. The drive will pull the CD in
the rest of the way and begin to play
it. When the system reaches the end
of the disc, it will return to the
beginning and play the disc again.
You cannot load and play 3-inch
(8-cm)discsinthissystem.
If you turn the system off while a CD
is playing, either with the PWR/VOL
knob or by turning off the ignition,
the disc will stay in the drive. When
youturnthesystembackon,theCD
will begin playing where it left off.
To listen to satellite radio when a CD
is playing, press the AUX/XM or XM
button.
To play the radio when a CD is
playing, press the AM/FM button
(AM or FM button). Press the CD
button again to switch back to the
CD player.
To select a different disc, press the
appropriate preset button (1 6). On
models with navigation system,
touch the appropriate disc icon. If
youselectanemptypositioninthe
CD changer, the system will go into
the loading sequence.
On models with Satellite RadioLX models
Playing a Disc, Disc Changer
To Play a CD
Features
131
Do not use discs with adhesive labels.
The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
＋
−
＋
−
−
−
You cannot load and play 3-inch
(8-cm)discsinthissystem.
Press and hold the LOAD button
until you hear a beep and see
‘‘LOAD’’ in the display, then
release the button.
To load only one CD, press and
release the LOAD button.
Insert the CD into the CD slot.
Insert it only about halfway; the
drive will pull it in the rest of the
way. You will see ‘‘BUSY’’ in the
display. The CD loaded indicator
turns red and blinks as the CD is
loaded.
Ontheupperleftsideofthe
display, the disc number for an
empty position will begin blinking,
and the green CD load indicator
will come on.
When ‘‘LOAD’’ appears again in
the display, insert the next CD into
the CD slot.
Do not try to insert a disc until
‘‘LOAD’’ appears. You could
damage the audio unit.
Repeat this until all six positions
are loaded. The system will then
begin playing the last CD loaded.
If you are not loading CDs into all six
positions, press the LOAD button
again after the last CD has loaded.
The system will begin playing the
last CD loaded.
If you stop loading CDs before all six
positions are filled, the system will
wait for 10 seconds, then stop the
load operation and begin playing the
last CD loaded.
Each time you press and
release /( ), the player skips
forward to the beginning of the next
track. Press and release /( )
to skip backward to the beginning of
the previous track.
To move rapidly within a track, press
andholdthe /( )or /
( ). You will see CUE or REW in
the display.
To continuously replay
a track, press and release the RPT
button. You will see RPT in the
display. Press it again to turn it off.
This feature plays the
tracks in random order. To activate
random play, press and release the
RDM button. You will see RDM in
the display. This continues until you
press the RDM button again.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Except for LX model
Loading CDs in the In-dash CD
Changer
SKIP
REPEAT
RANDOM
Playing a Disc, Disc Changer
132
Main Menu
Table of Contents
On vehicles with navigation systemOn vehicles with navigation system
On vehicles with navigation system
On LX models
When you press the RDM button or
touch the TRACK RANDOM icon on
the screen, the system plays the
tracks of the current disc in random
order. You will see RDM (TRACK
RANDOM) in the display. To turn
this feature off, press the RDM
button (touch TRACK RANDOM)
again.
Press the eject button ( ) to
remove the CD. If you eject the CD,
but do not remove it from the slot,
the system will automatically reload
the CD after 10 seconds and put it in
pause mode. To begin playing, press
the CD button.
Press the AM/FM button to switch
to the radio while a CD is playing.
Press the CD button to play the CD.
If you turn the system off while a CD
is playing, either with the PWR/VOL
knob or by turning off the ignition,
the CD will stay in the drive. When
youturnthesystembackon,theCD
will begin playing where it left off.
When you press and release the RPT
button or touch the TRACK
REPEAT icon on the screen, the
system continuously replays the
current track. As a reminder, you
will see RPT (TRACK REPEAT) in
the display. To turn this feature off,
press the RPT button, or touch the
TRACK REPEAT icon again.
WhenyoupressandholdtheRPT
button until D-RPT (DISC REPEAT)
is in the display, or when you touch
the DISC REPEAT icon on the
screen, the system continuously
replays the current disc. As a
reminder, you will see D-RPT in the
display.
Playing a Disc, Disc Changer
Random Play within a Disc To Stop Playing a CDTrack Repeat
Disc Repeat
Features
133
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−＋
To remove the disc currently in play,
press the eject ( ) button. When
a disc is removed from a slot, the
system automatically begins the load
sequence so you can load another
CD in that position. If you do not
remove the disc from the changer
within 15 seconds, the system
returns to the previous mode (AM/
FM or satellite radio). The disc will
reload into the system and will
remainthereinapausemode.
To remove a different CD from the
changer,firstselectitwiththe
appropriate preset button. When that
CD begins playing, press the eject
button. Continue pressing the eject
button to remove all the discs from
the changer.
You can also eject discs when the
ignition switch is off. The disc that
was last selected is ejected first.
To eject one disc, press and release
the eject button.
To eject all discs, press and hold the
eject button until the system beeps.
Load the desired CDs into the
magazine, and load the magazine
into the changer according to the
instructions that came with the unit.
To select the CD changer, press the
CD button. The CD and track
numbers will be displayed. To select
a different CD, use the preset 5
(DISC ) or preset 6 (DISC )
button. If you select an empty slot in
the magazine, the changer will, after
finding that slot empty, try to load
the CD in the next slot.
Except for LX model Optional on LX models
Playing a Disc, Disc Changer
Removing CDs from the In-dash
CD Changer
Operating the Optional CD
Changer
134
Main Menu
Table of Contents
When using CD-R discs, use only
high quality CDs labeled for audio
use.
When a CD is not being played, store
it in its case to protect it from dust
and other contamination. To prevent
warpage, keep CDs out of direct
sunlight and extreme heat.
To clean a CD, use a clean soft cloth.
Wipe across the CD from the center
to the outside edge.
AnewCDmayberoughonthe
inner and outer edges. The small
plastic pieces causing this roughness
can flake off and fall on the re-
cording surface of the CD, causing
skipping or other problems. Remove
these pieces by rubbing the inner
and outer edges with the side of a
pencil or pen.
Handle a CD by its edges; never
touch either surface. Do not place
stabilizer rings or labels on the CD.
These, along with contamination
from fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tip
pens, can cause the CD to not play
properly or possibly jam in the drive.
Never try to insert foreign objects in
the CD player or the CD changer.
When recording a CD-R or
CD-RW, the recording must be
closedforittobeusedbythe
system.
Play only standard round CDs.
Odd-shaped CDs may jam in the
driveorcauseotherproblems.
Handle your CDs properly to
prevent damage and skipping. See
this page.
General Information Protecting Discs
Protecting Your Discs
Features
135
Do not use discs with adhesive labels.
The label can curl up and cause the
disc to jam in the unit.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Error Message Cause Solution
CauseError Message Solution
FOCUS Error
Mechanical Error,
or a DVD has
been loaded in the
CD player
High Temperature
Press the EJECT button and pull out the CD.
Check if it is inserted correctly in the CD player.
Make sure the CD is not scratched or damaged.
Press the EJECT button and pull out the CD.
Check the CD for damage or deformation. If
the CD cannot be pulled out, or the error
message does not disappear after the CD is
ejected, see your dealer.
Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
FOCUS Error
Mechanical Error,
or a DVD has
been loaded in the
CD player
High Temperature
Press the EJECT button and pull out the CD.
Check if it is inserted correctly in the CD player.
Make sure the CD is not scratched or damaged.
Press the EJECT button and pull out the CD.
Check the CD for damage or deformation. If
the CD cannot be pulled out, or the error
message does not disappear after the CD is
ejected, see your dealer.
Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
Thechartontherightexplainsthe
error messages you may see in the
display while playing a disc.
If you see an error message in the
display while playing a disc, press
the eject button. After ejecting the
disc, check it for damage or
deformation. If there is no damage,
insert the disc again.
Theaudiosystemwilltrytoplaythe
disc. If there is still a problem, the
error message will reappear. Press
the eject button, and pull out the disc.
Insert a different disc. If the new
disc plays, there is a problem with
the first disc. If the error message
cycle repeats and you cannot clear it,
take your vehicle to a dealer.
LX models
EX and EX-L models
Disc Player Error Messages
136
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Error Message Cause Solution
FOCUS Error
No CD in the CD
magazine
Mechanical Error
High Temperature
No CD magazine in the
CD changer.
Press the magazine EJECT button and pull it
out. Check for an error message, and insert the
magazine again. If the message does not
disappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,
see your dealer.
Insert a CD.
Press the magazine EJECT button and pull it
out. Check for an error message and insert the
magazine again. If the message does not
disappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,
see your dealer.
This message should disappear when the
temperature returns to normal.
Insert the CD magazine.
Thechartontherightexplainsthe
error messages you may see in the
display while playing a disc.
If you see an error message in the
display while playing a disc, press
the eject button. After ejecting the
disc, check it for damage or
deformation. If there is no damage,
insert the disc again.
Theaudiosystemwilltrytoplaythe
disc. If there is still a problem, the
error message will reappear. Press
the eject button, and pull out the disc.
Insert a different disc. If the new
disc plays, there is a problem with
the first disc. If the error message
cycle repeats and you cannot clear it,
take your vehicle to a dealer.
Optional on LX models
Disc Changer Error Messages
Features
137
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you are playing a CD
If you are listening to the radio
On EX and EX-L models
,usetheCH
buttontoskiptothebeginningofthe
next track. You will see the CD and
track number in the display.
,usethe
CHbuttontogotothenextpreset
station. You will see the number of
the preset button in the display. To
change bands, press the AM/FM
button.The MODE button changes the
audio mode between FM1, FM2, AM,
XM, CD, and DVD/AUX (if a disc is
inserted).
The CH button has three functions,
depending on whether you are
listening to the radio, or playing a
CD.
The middle button adjusts the
volume. Press the top or bottom of
the button and hold it until the
desired volume is reached, then
release it.
Three controls for the audio system
are mounted in the steering wheel
hub. These let you control basic
functions without removing your
hand from the wheel.
Remote Audio Controls
138
CH BUTTON
VOLUME
BUTTON
MODE
BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you lose the card, you must obtain
the code number from a dealer. To
do this, you will need the system’s
serial number.
Your vehicle’s audio system will
disable itself if it is disconnected
from electrical power for any reason.
To make it work again, you must
enter a specific five-digit code in the
preset buttons. Because there are
hundreds of number combinations
possible from five-digits, making the
system work without knowing the
exact code is nearly impossible.
Youshouldhavereceivedacardthat
lists your audio system code number
and serial number. It is best to store
this card in a safe place at home. In
addition, you should write the audio
system’s serial number in this owner’s
manual.
You will have to store your favorite
stations in the preset buttons after
the system begins working. Your
original settings were lost when the
power was disconnected.
If your vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or goes dead, or the
radio fuse is removed, the audio
system will disable itself. If this
happens, you will see ‘‘ENTER
CODE’’ in the frequency display the
nexttimeyouturnonthesystem.
Use the preset buttons (icons on
vehicles with navigation system) to
enter the code. The code is on the
radio code card included in your
owner’s manual kit. When it is
entered correctly, the radio will start
playing.
If you make a mistake entering the
code, do not start over; complete the
sequence, then enter the correct
code. You have ten tries to enter the
correct code. If you are unsuccessful
in ten attempts, you must then leave
the system on for 1 hour before
trying again.
On EX and EX-L models
Radio Theft Protection
Features
139
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Setting the Clock
140
CLOCK
H BUTTON
M BUTTON
CLOCK CLOCK BUTTON
H BUTTON
RESET BUTTON
M BUTTON
SET BUTTON
LX models
EX and EX-L models
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
＋
You can quickly set the time to the
nearest hour. If the displayed time is
before the half hour, pressing and
holding the clock button, then
pressing the RESET (preset 6)
buttonsetstheclockbacktothe
previous hour. If the displayed time
is after the half hour, the clock sets
forward to the beginning of the next
hour.
For example: 1:06 will reset to 1:00
1:52 will reset to 2:00
The display shows the time when the
ignition is in the ACCESSORY (I) or
the ON (II) position.
Press and hold the SET (TUNE)
button until the numbers flash.
Change the hours by pressing the
H ( ) button until the numbers
advance to the desired time. Change
the minutes by pressing the M ( )
button until the numbers advance to
the desired time. When you are
finished, press the SET button again.
Refer to the navigation system
manual for how to adjust the time.
Press and hold the CLOCK (SCAN/
RPT) button. Change the hours by
pressing the H (preset 4) button
until the numbers advance to the
desired time. Change the minutes by
pressing the M (preset 5) button
until the numbers advance to the
desired time. When you are finished,
release the CLOCK button.
On models with Navigation System
EX and EX-L modelsLX models
Setting the Clock
Features
141
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Rear Entertainment System
142
PAUSE
BUTTON
REAR POWER
BUTTON
REAR CONTROL OFF ICON
REAR SPEAKER OFF ICON
DVD/AUX BUTTON
REPEAT BUTTON
EX-L models
RANDOM
BUTTON
PLAY
BUTTON
REAR CTRL KNOB
SEEK/SKIP BAR
REAR ICON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your vehicle is equipped with a rear
entertainment system that includes a
DVD player for the enjoyment of the
rear passengers.
With this system, the rear
passengers can enjoy a different
entertainment source (AM/FM
radio, XM radio, CD changer, or
DVD player) than the front seat
occupants. The audio is broadcast
through the supplied wireless
headphones.
The ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)
position to operate the rear
entertainment system.
Press the REAR PWR button. To
turn on the rear controls (ceiling
panel/remote control), press the RR
CTRL knob. The system’s icon
shows in the upper display. Your
passengers can then operate the rear
system with the control panel in the
ceiling. The rear control panel can be
used as a remote control when it is
detached from the ceiling unit. Press
the RR CTRL knob again to turn the
rear controls off. You will see the
RearControlsOfficonintheupper
display.
Whenyouturnonthesystem,the
rear speakers are automatically
turned off if the rear system selects
a different entertainment source
than the front system. You will see
the Rear Speakers Off icon in the
upper display. The sound for the rear
system is sent to the wireless
headphones.
The rear speakers are
connected to the front system, so
they will always play the source that
the front system is set to.
Ifyouwanttoturntherearspeakers
on again, press and hold the REAR
PWR button until the Rear Speakers
Off icon goes off.
The rear system selects the source it
waslastsetto.Ifthatsourcehas
been removed (the DVD has been
ejected from the player, for example),
you will see ‘‘DVD EJECT’’ in the
display. You must select another
source.
To Turn On the System Rear Speakers
Rear Entertainment System
Features
143
NOTE:
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＊
＊
To operate the rear entertainment
system from the front panel, turn the
RR CTRL knob clockwise. The
amber RR LED comes on to show
that the control panel is enabled.
The DVD player in your rear
entertainment system can play DVD
video discs and CDs. It features
Dolby noise reduction.
Open the overhead screen by
pushing the OPEN button. The
screen will swing down part-way.
Pivot the screen the rest of the way.
If you pivot the screen too far
forward, past the second detent, the
display will turn off. Pivot the screen
back to the second or first detent to
turn the display back on. To close
the screen, pivot it up until it latches.
To play the radio, the buttons for the
front entertainment system have the
same functions.
IfaCDisloadedinthemainCD
player or CD changer, select CD/
CHG.IftheCDisloadedinthe
lower player, select DVD/AUX.
Dolby noise reduction is manufactured under
license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing
Corporation. ‘‘DOLBY’’ and the double-D symbol
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories
Licensing Corporation.
To Select Rear Entertainment
from the Front Control Panel
Operating the DVD Player from
the Front Control Panel
Rear Entertainment System
144
REAR CONTROL PANEL
OPEN BUTTON
OVERHEAD SCREEN
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
Turn the Rear CTRL knob clockwise.
The amber Rear LED comes on to
show that the control panel is now
enabled.
Insert a DVD into the DVD/CD
player below the front panel.
Push the DVD in halfway, the drive
will pull it in the rest of the way.
Press the PLAY button if
the DVD does not start playing
automatically.
Press the PAUSE button
to pause the DVD. Press the button
again or press PLAY to resume.
Pause works only with the DVD
player.
CONTINUED
PLAY
PAUSE
Rear Entertainment System
Features
145
EJECT
BUTTON
PLAY BUTTON PAUSE
BUTTON
REAR CTRL KNOB
SEEK/SKIP BAR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−−
＋
−
＋
−
Press the eject button to
remove the DVD from the drive.
Press and hold the
button to move forward; you will
see ‘‘CUE’’ in the display. Press and
hold the button to move
backward; you will see ‘‘REV’’ in the
display. Release the button when the
system reaches the point you want.
Each time you press and release the
button of the SEEK/SKIP, the
system skips forward to the
beginning of the next track or
chapter. Press and release the
buttontoskipbackwardtothe
beginning of the current track or
chapter. Press it again to skip to the
beginning of the previous track or
chapter.
To return front panel control to the
front audio system, turn the REAR
CTRL knob counterclockwise.
To turn on the rear entertainment
system from the rear control panel,
press the PWR button. Use the AM/
FM button, XM button (U.S. models),
CD button, DVD/AUX button (U.S.
models), or AUX button (Canadian
models) to select the entertainment
source. The selected source will be
shown in the display. Make sure the
rear control operation has not been
disabled with the REAR CTRL knob
on the front panel.
Rear Entertainment System
EJECTSEEK/SKIP
To Return to Front Audio
Controls
Using the Rear Control Panel
146
Main Menu
Table of Contents
▲▼
▲▼
▲
▼
Use the and buttons to select a
station from the preset buttons.
Press the button to search up
the channels in the channel mode.
The system will search up the
channels within the category when
the radio is in the category mode.
Press the button to search
down the channels in the channel
mode. The system will search down
the channels within the category
when the radio is in the category
mode.
Use the and buttons to select a
station from the preset buttons.
Press the button to tune the radio
to a higher frequency, or press the
button to tune to a lower frequency.
Pressing the or button
causes the system to search up or
down the band for a station with a
strong signal. You will see SEEK in
the display.
CONTINUED
Rear Entertainment System
To Play the Radio from the Rear
Control Panel
To Play the XM Radio from the
Rear Control Panel
Features
147
Main Menu
Table of Contents
▲▼
Press the or button to
select another category.
Pressing and holding the DISP
button for more than 5 seconds will
change the search mode between
Channel Search and Category
Search. Each time you press and
release the DISP button, the display
above the rear control panel changes
in the following sequence: Channel
Number, Category Name, Music
Name, Artist Name, Channel Name,
and back to Channel Number.
If CDs are loaded in the CD changer,
select them by pressing the CD
button. If a CD is loaded in the DVD
player, press the DVD/AUX button.
Pressthe buttontoskiptothe
beginning of the next track. Press
the button to return to the
beginning of the current track.
To move rapidly within a track, press
andholdthe or button.
The system will continue to move
through the track. Press the
button to move forward, or the
button to move backward.
Release the button when the system
reaches the point you want.
If CDs are loaded in the CD changer
and the overhead screen is not open,
pressing the or button changes
the discs.
Rear Entertainment System
To Play a CD from the Rear
Control Panel
148
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The video screen is for use by rear
seat passengers only. The driver and
front seat passenger should not try
to view the screen while driving.
Press the button when you
want to pause the DVD. Press this
button again to go back to PLAY.
Pressthe buttontoskiptothe
beginning of the next chapter. Press
the button to return to the
beginning of the current chapter.
To move rapidly within a chapter,
press and hold the or
button. The system will
continue to move through the
chapter. Press the button to
move forward, or the button to
move backward. Release the button
when the system reaches the point
you want.
ToselectthemenuontheDVD,
press the MENU/SCROLL button
(U.S. models) or MENU button
(Canadian models). Use the ,
, , and buttons to
move to the desired menu selection,
then press the ENT button to enter
your selection.
Open the overhead screen by
pushing the OPEN button. The
screen will swing down part-way.
Pivot the screen the rest of the way.
If you pivot the screen too far
forward, past the second detent, the
display will turn off. Pivot the screen
back to the second or first detent to
turn the display back on. To close
the screen, pivot it up until it latches.
To Play a DVD from the Rear
Control Panel
Rear Entertainment System
Features
149
REAR CONTROL PANEL
OPEN
BUTTON
OVERHEAD SCREEN
Main Menu
Table of Contents
When you press the DISP button
while a DVD is playing, the title,
chapter, elapsed time, and personal
surround logo are displayed
(STATUS 1).
When you press the DISP button
again, the subtitle, audio, angle,
sound characteristics, and personal
surround logo are displayed
(STATUS 2).
To go back to play, press the DISP
button.
DISP Button
Rear Entertainment System
150
Main Menu
Table of Contents
When you press the SETUP button
while a DVD is playing, the DVD’s
setup menu is displayed at the
bottom of the screen. You can then
change various settings of play mode,
personal surround, and display. To
go back to play without changing any
setting, press the RETURN or
SETUP button, or select ‘‘Close’’ by
pressing the or button,
then press the ENT button.
When you select ‘‘Play Mode’’ by
pressing the or button, the
play mode setup menu is displayed
abovethe‘‘PlayMode’’icon.
When you press the MENU button
while a DVD is playing, the DVD’s
main menu is displayed. To go back
to play, press the MENU button
again.
CONTINUED
MENU Button System Messages
Play Mode
Rear Entertainment System
Features
151
Main Menu
Table of Contents
▼▲
▼▲
▼▲
Top Menu Audio
When you select ‘‘TOP MENU’’
using the or button, the DVD’s
title menu is displayed. This menu is
also displayed when you press the
MENU button while a DVD is not
playing.
When you select ‘‘Audio’’ from the
play mode setup menu by pressing
the or button, you will see a
submenu of the dubbed language.
The selectable languages vary from
DVD to DVD, and this feature may
notbeavailableonsomeDVDs.
Press the RETURN or ENT button
to go back to the play mode setup
menu.
Select the desired language by
pressing the or button. The
sound characteristics (Dolby Digital,
LPCM, MPEG Audio, dts) recorded
with the selected language are also
displayed next to the language.
To go back to play, press the return
button.
Rear Entertainment System
152
Main Menu
Table of Contents
▼▲
▼
▲▼▲
▼▲
Subtitle Angle
To turn the subtitle on and off, select
‘‘Subtitle’’ from the setup menu by
pressing the or button. You will
see submenu ‘‘OFF’’ or ‘‘ON.’’ Select
‘‘OFF’’ or ‘‘ON’’ by pressing the or
button.
If more than one subtitle language is
available, you will see the language
currently selected when you select
‘‘ON’’ in the previous step.
Select the desired subtitle language
by pressing the or button.
Press the RETURN or ENT button
to go back to the play mode setup
menu.
On some DVDs, the scenes are
recorded by more than one camera,
giving different viewpoints of the
same scene. To change the angle,
select ‘‘Angle’’ from the setup menu.
Youwillseeasubmenuifthereare
different angles available.
Select the number on the submenu
by pressing the or button.
Press the RETURN or ENT button
to go back to the play mode setup
menu.
CONTINUED
Rear Entertainment System
Features
153
Main Menu
Table of Contents
▼▲
▼▲
▼▲
▼
▲
Search
When you select ‘‘Search’’ from the
play mode setup menu, you will see
the submenu shown above. In the
left submenu, you can select
between ‘‘Title’’ and ‘‘Chapter.’’ The
right submenu displays the current
title or chapter number and the total
number of titles or chapters.
To do a title search, select ‘‘Title’’ by
pressing the or button. Change
the number on the right submenu by
pressing the or button, and
press the ENT button to begin the
title search. If you press the
RETURN button, the display returns
totheplaymodesetupmenuwithout
doing the search.
To do a chapter search, select
‘‘Chapter’’ by pressing the or
button. Change the number on the
right submenu by pressing the or
button, and press the ENT button
to begin the chapter search. If you
press the RETURN button, the
display returns to the play mode
setup menu without doing the search.
Rear Entertainment System
154
Main Menu
Table of Contents
NumInput
A numerical command can be issued
to a DVD by inputting a two digit
number, and a button number can be
selected on the screen.
Select and enter the second digit
number the same way. The cursor
will automatically move to the ‘‘ENT’’
icon when you press the ENT button.
Press the ENT button to enter the
number command. To go back to the
DVD screen, press the RETURN
button.
Select the first digit number using
the , , , or
button, and enter it by pressing
the ENT button. If you want to
change the number, select ‘‘DEL,’’
and press the ENT button, then
select and enter the new number.
Select the ‘‘Num Input’’ from the play
mode setup menu. The screen will
change as shown above. If you select
the ‘‘Move Key’’ using the ,
, , or button, and
press the ENT button, the Num
Input display on the screen will
changefromtheleftsidetoright
side or right to left.
CONTINUED
Rear Entertainment System
Features
155
Main Menu
Table of Contents
▼▲
When you select ‘‘PERSONAL
SURROUND’’ by pressing the
or button, the personal
surround setup menu is displayed
above the ‘‘PERSONAL
SURROUND’’ icon.
Selecting one of the sound effects,
Cinema,Music,orVoice,fromthe
personal surround menu allows you
to change the sound in your
headphones to match the disc you
are playing.
Select ‘‘Cinema,’’ ‘‘Music,’’ or ‘‘Voice’’
by pressing the or button, and
enter your selection by pressing the
ENT button. The ‘‘PERSONAL
SURROUND’’ logo is displayed in
the upper right corner of the screen.
If you select ‘‘Off,’’ the logo
disappears, and there will be no
special sound effect.
You can adjust these display
settings:
Back Light
Contrast
Brightness
Tint
Color
To adjust the display, select
‘‘Display’’ by pressing the or
button, and enter your
selection by pressing the ENT
button. The display changes as
shown above.
Personal Surround Display
Rear Entertainment System
156
Main Menu
Table of Contents
▼▲
▼▲
Select the quality you want to adjust
by pressing the or button, and
then pressing the ENT button. The
adjustment bar is displayed next to
the selected item. Adjust the setting
by pressing the or button.
When you are finished with your
adjustment, press the ENT button.
If you want to set the display to the
default setting, select ‘‘Reset’’ by
pressing the or button, and,
then pressing the ENT button.
The display changes as shown above.
Select ‘‘Yes,’’ and press the ENT
button. You will see the message
‘‘Default display settings applied’’ on
the display for 5 seconds.
CONTINUED
Rear Entertainment System
Features
157
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Screen Mode
You can set the screen mode to
these settings:
Normal
Wide
Zoom
Full
Rear Entertainment System
158
Normal Wide
Zoom Full
Main Menu
Table of Contents
▼▲
Select the ‘‘Aspect Ratio’’ by pressing
the or button, then press
the ENT button.
The selectable setting menu is
displayed, and the current setting is
highlighted in blue.
Select the desired setting by
pressing the or button, then
press the ENT button.
The selected setting will be
highlighted in blue for one second,
and the screen returns to the play
mode in the selected setting.
CONTINUED
Rear Entertainment System
Features
159
Main Menu
Table of Contents
▼▲
When you press the SETUP button
on the rear control panel when a
DVD is not playing, the ‘‘INITIAL
SETTINGS’’ menu is displayed.
When you select ‘‘Language’’ with
the or button, the menu
shown above appears.
To return to the stop or prestop
screen, select ‘‘Close’’ using the
or button, and then press
the ENT, or the SETUP button.
To select the language used in the
DISC menus, select ‘‘Menu Lang’’ by
pressing the or button. You will
see the submenu next to ‘‘Menu
Lang.’’
There are two selectable menus:
‘‘Language’’ and ‘‘Others.’’
Menu Language
INITIAL SETTINGS Menu INITIAL SETTINGS (Language)
Rear Entertainment System
160
Main Menu
Table of Contents
▼▲
Select the desired language by
pressing the or button, and
then pressing the ENT button.
The selectable languages are,
English, French, Spanish, German,
Italian, Dutch, and Japanese.
If you want another language than
those listed, you need to enter the
code number of the desired language.
Select ‘‘other,’’ and press the ENT
button. The display changes as
showninthenextcolumn.
If you select ‘‘No,’’ and press the
ENT button, the display returns to
the initial screen of the ‘‘Language’’
menu.
CONTINUED
Rear Entertainment System
Features
161
Main Menu
Table of Contents
▼▲
Audio Language
You can select the dubbed language
before playing DVDs.
Select ‘‘Audio Lang’’ by pressing the
or button. You will see the
submenu next to ‘‘Audio Lang.’’
Follow the same instructions you
used to set the menu language.
If you made a mistake entering a
number, select ‘‘DEL’’ on the display
with the , , , or
button, and press the ENT
buttononthecontrolpanel.Then
select and enter the correct number
as described. The display returns to
the initial ‘‘Language’’ menu screen.
If you select ‘‘Yes,’’ the display
changes to the language code input
mode. Select the first number using
the,,,or
button, and press the ENT
button to enter it. Repeat this until all
four numbers are entered. When the
fourth number is entered, the cursor
automatically moves to ‘‘ENT’’ on the
display. Press the ENT button on the
control panel to enter the new
language code.
Rear Entertainment System
162
Main Menu
Table of Contents
▼▲
Subtitle Language
You can select the subtitle language
before playing DVDs.
Select ‘‘Subtitle Lang’’ by pressing
the or button. You will see the
submenu next to the ‘‘Subtitle Lang.’’
When you select ‘‘Others’’ at the
bottom of the ‘‘INITIAL SETTINGS’’
screen, the above menu appears on
the screen.
Dynamic Range
‘‘Dynamic Range’’ reduces the
differences between the loud and
quiet sound levels throughout the
disc. When this is on, the louder
sounds are lowered, and quieter
sounds are increased.
Follow the same instructions you
used to set the menu language.
CONTINUED
INITIAL SETTINGS (Others)
Rear Entertainment System
Features
163
Main Menu
Table of Contents
▼▲ ▼▲
When you select the ‘‘Dynamic
Range’’ by pressing the or
button, you will see the submenu
next to the ‘‘Dynamic Range’’ as
shown above.
To turn ‘‘Dynamic Range’’ on or off,
select ‘‘ON’’ or ‘‘OFF’’ by pressing
the or button, and then
press the ENT button.
Angle Mark
When you switch to another angle
while playing a DVD, the angle mark
is displayed in the upper right corner
of the screen.
You can set the system to display or
not display this angle mark.
Select ‘‘Angle Mark’’ by pressing the
or button. The above submenu
appears. If you want the angle mark
to be displayed, select ‘‘ON’’ with the
or button, and then press
the ENT button. The display returns
to the ‘‘Others’’ menu.
Rear Entertainment System
164
ANGLE MARK
Main Menu
Table of Contents
▼▲
Parental Control Level
You can place an auditory restriction
by changing the parental control
level. The higher the level number,
the lower the restriction.
Select ‘‘Parental Level’’ by pressing
the or button. You will see the
submenu shown above. If you select
‘‘No,’’ and press the ENT button, the
display returns to the ‘‘Others’’ menu.
When you select and enter ‘‘Yes,’’
the display changes as shown above.
To change the level, you need to
enter your four digit password.
Select the number for the first digit
by pressing the , , , or
button, and enter it by pressing
the ENT button. Repeat this until all
four digits are filled. When you enter
the fourth number, the cursor
automatically moves to ‘‘ENT’’ on the
display. Press the ENT button on the
control panel.
CONTINUED
Rear Entertainment System
Features
165
Main Menu
Table of Contents
▼▲
If the system does not recognize the
password you entered, you will see
the above display. Repeat the
parental control level steps until you
enter the correct password.
If you enter the password correctly,
you can then change the parental
control level.
Once you correctly enter the
password, press the or button
to change the level, and then press
the ENT button to enter your
selection.
Changing the Password
The password was set to ‘‘1111’’
when the vehicle left the factory.
Rear Entertainment System
166
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To change the password, select
‘‘Password.’’ You will see the above
menu displayed. Select ‘‘Yes’’ by
pressing the or button,
then press the ENT button.
If you select ‘‘No,’’ and press the
ENT button, the display returns to
the ‘‘Others’’ menu.
If the system does not recognize the
password you entered, you will see
the above display. Repeat the
password setting steps until you
enter the correct password.
Select the first number by pressing
the,,,or
button, and enter it by pressing
the ENT button. Repeat this until all
four numbers are entered. When you
enter the fourth number, the cursor
automatically moves to ‘‘ENT’’ on the
display. Press the ENT button on the
control panel.
CONTINUED
Rear Entertainment System
Features
167
Main Menu
Table of Contents
▲
If you forget the password, select
‘‘Password,’’ and press the button
10 times.
The display changes as shown above.
If you want to use the default
password (1111), select ‘‘Yes,’’ and
press the ENT button.
The message ‘‘Default password
setting applied’’ is displayed for
5 seconds.
Rear Entertainment System
168
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If it takes several pushes on the
button to operate the rear
entertainment system, have your
dealer replace the batteries as soon
as possible.
The rear control panel can be
detached from the ceiling unit and
used as a remote control. To remove
it from the ceiling unit, press the
release button. The control panel will
swing down partway. Pivot it down
further past the detent until it
detaches from the hinge. To reinstall
it, reverse the procedure.
Battery type: BR3032
As required by the FCC: This device
complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not
cause harmful interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference
received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Remote Control Replacing the Remote Control
Batteries
Rear Entertainment System
Features
169
COVER
RELEASE BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
There are various types of DVDs
available. Some of them are not
compatible with your system.
The DVD player in your Rear
Entertainment System can play
DVDs and CDs bearing the above
marks on their packages or jackets.
Those packages or jackets should
also bear the designation of ‘‘1’’ or
‘‘ALL’’. DVD-ROMs cannot be played
in this system.
The tips on how to handle and
protect DVDs are basically the same
as those for compact discs. Refer to
‘‘Protecting Your CDs’’ on page .
135
Playable DVDs Protecting DVDs
Rear Entertainment System
170
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you see an error message in the
screen while operating the DVD
player,findthecauseinthechartto
the right. If you cannot clear the
message, take your vehicle to a
dealer.
Message Solution
ERROR F0
ERROR F2
Invalid region code
Invalid disc
Parental control active.
Change level to view.
Eject the disc and reinsert it.
Use a disc with the regional designation of ‘‘1’’ or ‘‘All’’.
The disc is not playable in this unit. Eject the disc, and insert a disc
compatible with this system.
Reinsert the disc, and increase the parental control level (see
pages 165 and 166 ).
DVD Player Error Messages
Rear Entertainment System
Features
171
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Each headphone uses one AAA
battery. The battery is under the
cover on the left earpiece. To
remove the cover, insert a coin in the
slot and twist it slightly to pry the
cover away from the earpiece. Pull
the cover outward, and pivot it out of
the way.
Some state and local government
agencies prohibit the use of
headphones by the driver of a motor
vehicle. Always obey applicable laws
and regulations.
The audio for the rear entertainment
system is sent to the wireless
headphones that come with the
system. When using the headphones,
make sure you wear them correctly:
L (left) and R (right) are marked on
the sides of the frame. The antennas
are in the front of the earpieces. If
you wear the headphones backwards,
the antennas will be aimed away
from the system, affecting the sound
quality and range.
To use the headphones, pivot the
earpieces outward. This turns them
on. To adjust the volume, turn the
dial on the bottom of the right
earpiece. When you remove the
headphones, the earpieces
automatically pivot inward, and the
headphones turn off. When not in
use, store the headphones in the
pocket of either front seat.
Replacing Batteries
Wireless Headphones
Rear Entertainment System
172
VOLUME
DIAL
TAB
Main Menu
Table of Contents
There are three headphone
connectors for the third seat
passengers. Each connector has its
own volume control.
The system will accept auxiliary
inputs from standard video games
and video equipment.
V=Videojack
L = Left audio jack
R = Right audio jack
Auxiliary input jacks and headphone
connectors for the rear
entertainment system are on the
back of the center console
compartment.
Remove the battery. Install the new
battery in the earpiece as shown in
the diagram next to the battery slot.
Slide the cover back into place on the
earpiece, then press down on the
back edge to lock it in place.
Auxiliary Input Jacks
Rear Entertainment System
Features
173
AUXILIARY INPUT JACKSBATTERY
COVER
HEADPHONE CONNECTORS
VOLUME
DIALS
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The security system helps to protect
your vehicle and valuables from theft.
The horn sounds and a combination
of headlights, parking lights, side
marker lights, and taillights flash if
someone attempts to break into your
vehicle. This alarm continues for 2
minutes, then the system resets. To
reset an alarm system before the 2
minutes have elapsed, unlock the
driver’s front door with the key or
the remote transmitter.
The security system will not set if
the hood, the tailgate, or any door is
not fully closed. If the system will not
set, check the Door and Tailgate
Open Monitor on the instrument
panel (see page ) to see if the
doors and the tailgate are fully
closed. Since it is not part of the
monitor display, manually check the
hood.
Do not attempt to alter this system
or add other devices to it.
The security system automatically
sets 15 seconds after you lock the
doors, hood, and the tailgate. For the
system to activate, you must lock the
doors from the outside with the key,
lock tab, door lock switch, or remote
transmitter. The security system
indicator next to the driver’s door
lock starts blinking immediately to
show you the system is setting itself.
Once the security system is set,
opening any door, the tailgate, or the
hood without using the key or the
remote transmitter, will cause it to
alarm. It also alarms if the radio is
removed from the dashboard or the
wiring is cut.
66
On EX and EX-L models
Security System
174
SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Cruise control allows you to maintain
asetspeedabove25mph(40km/h)
without keeping your foot on the
accelerator pedal. It should be used
for cruising on straight, open
highways. It is not recommended for
city driving, winding roads, slippery
roads, heavy rain, or bad weather.
Accelerate to the desired cruising
speedabove25mph(40km/h).
Press and release the SET/
DECELbuttononthesteering
wheel. The indicator on the
instrument panel comes on to
show the system is now activated.
Push in the cruise control master
button. The indicator on the
instrument panel will come on.
Cruise control may not hold the set
speed when you are going up and
down hills. If your speed increases
going down a hill, use the brakes to
slow down. This will cancel cruise
control. To resume the set speed,
press the RES/ACCEL button. The
indicator on the instrument panel will
come back on.
1.
2.
3.
Using the Cruise Control
Cruise Control
Features
175
CRUISE CONTROL MASTER BUTTON
CANCEL
BUTTON
SET/DECEL
BUTTON
RES/ACCEL BUTTON
Improper use of the cruise
control can lead to a crash.
Use the cruise control only
when traveling on open
highways in good weather.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
You can increase the set cruising
speed in any of these ways:
Push on the accelerator pedal.
Accelerate to the desired cruising
speed, then press the SET/
DECEL button.
You can decrease the set cruising
speed in any of these ways:
Press and hold the SET/DECEL
button. Release the button when
you reach the desired speed.
To slow down in very small
amounts, tap the SET/DECEL
button. Each time you do this,
your vehicle will slow down about
1 mph (1.6 km/h).
Tap the brake pedal lightly with
your foot. The CRUISE
CONTROL indicator on the
instrument panel will go out.
When the vehicle slows to the
desired speed, press the SET/
DECEL button.
Even with the cruise control turned
on, you can still use the accelerator
pedal to speed up for passing. After
completing the pass, take your foot
off the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
will return to the set cruising speed.
Resting your foot on the brake pedal
causes cruise control to cancel.
You can cancel cruise control in any
of these ways:
Tap the brake pedal.
Push the CANCEL button on the
steering wheel.
Pushthecruisecontrolmaster
button.
To increase the speed in very
small amounts, tap the RES/
ACCEL button. Each time you do
this, your vehicle will speed up
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
When you push the CANCEL button
or tap on the brake pedal, the system
will remember the previously set
cruising speed. To return to that
speed, accelerate to above 25 mph
(40 km/h) and then press and
release the RES/ACCEL button. The
CRUISE CONTROL indicator comes
on. The vehicle will accelerate to the
same cruising speed as before.
Pressingthecruisecontrolmaster
button turns the system off and
erases the previous cruising speed.
Press and hold the RES/ACCEL
button. When you reach the
desired cruising speed, release the
button.
Changing the Set Speed Canceling Cruise Control
Resuming the Set Speed
Cruise Control
176
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The direction and center position
icons come on when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. The system then begins to
check the vehicle direction and
illuminates the appropriate icon(s).
The compass can be affected by
driving near power lines or stations,
across bridges, through tunnels,
over railroad crossings, past large
vehicles, or driving near large
objects that cause magnetic
interference. It can also be affected
by accessories such as antennas and
roof racks that are mounted by
magnets.
Your vehicle has a compass in the
rear view mirror. The compass
indicates the vehicle direction with
illuminated letters; N (north), S
(south), W (west), and E (east). The
center blue icon in the compass is
always on. It serves as a reference
point.
To turn the compass on or off, press
the compass button on the back of
the rear view mirror.
The compass mirror has a light
sensor behind the right side of the
rear view mirror. Make sure the
extended sun visor or an accessory is
not covering the sensor.
If equipped
Compass Function
Compass
Features
177
COMPASS
BUTTON
CENTER ICON
REAR VIEW MIRROR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The compass may need to be
manually calibrated after exposure to
a strong magnetic field. If the
compassseemstocontinuallyshow
the wrong direction, do this.
Drivethevehicleslowlyincircles
at less than 5 mph (8 km/h) until
the center icon turns blue. This
icon also turns blue by continuing
to drive the vehicle under normal
driving conditions. When you see
an actual heading on the compass,
calibration is completed.
In most areas, there is a variation
between magnetic north and true
north. Zone selection is required so
the compass can compensate for this
variation. To check and select the
zone, do this:
Find the zone for your area on the
zone map (see page ). Each
zone number (1 through 15)
corresponds to a compass zone on
the table (see page ).
Press and hold the compass
button for about 3 seconds. When
all of the direction icons begin to
blink, release the button.
The blue direction icon(s) blink
and show the current zone.
If the zone is incorrect, press and
release the compass button
repeatedly to get to the correct
number.
The compass will return to the
normal display about 4 seconds
after you stop adjusting a zone
number.
Do this procedure in an open
area, away from buildings, power
lines, and other vehicles.
With the blue center icon
displayed, press and hold the
compass button for about 6
seconds. When the center icon
turns red, release the button.
2.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.
5.
179
179
Compass Calibration
Compass Zone Selection
Compass
178
NOTE:
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Compass
Features
179
Zone Map
Compass Display for Each Zone
Main Menu
Table of Contents
▼
▲
When in reverse, the touch screen
and navigation system ‘‘hard’’
buttons are locked out, except the
‘‘ZOOM’’ button. Touching the ‘‘ ’’
or ‘‘ ’’ button allows you to adjust
the brightness of the rearview
camera image.
Whenever you shift to R (reverse)
with the ignition switch in the ON
(II) position, the rear view is shown
on the navigation or Compass
system screen.
Since the rearview camera display
area is limited, you should always
back up slowly and carefully, and
look behind you for obstacles.
For the best picture, always keep the
rearview camera clean, and do not
cover the camera lens. To avoid
scratching the lens when you clean it,
use a moist, soft cloth.
On EX-L models with navigation system
Rearview Camera and Monitor
180
REAR VIEW CAMERA
The camera brightness cannot be
adjusted by voice control.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
If you are training HomeLink to
operate a garage door or gate, you
should unplug the motor for that
device during training. Repeatedly
pressing the remote control button
could burn out the motor.
HomeLink stores the code in a
permanent memory. There should
be no need to retrain HomeLink if
your vehicle’s battery goes dead or is
disconnected.
The HomeLink
universal
transceiver built into your vehicle
canbeprogrammedtooperateupto
three remotely controlled devices
around your home, such as garage
doors, lighting, or home security
systems.
If your garage door opener was
manufactured before April 1982, you
may not be able to program
HomeLink to operate it. They do not
have the safety feature that causes
the motor to stop and reverse if an
obstacle is detected during closing,
increasing the risk of injury.
Always refer to the opening
instructions and safety information
that came with your garage door
opener or other equipment you
intend to operate with HomeLink. If
you do not have this information,
contact the manufacturer of the
equipment.
For quick and accurate training,
make sure the remote transmitter
for the device (garage door,
automatic gate, security system, etc.)
has a fresh battery.
If you just
received your vehicle and have not
trained any of the buttons in
HomeLink before, you should erase
any previously learned codes before
training the first button. To do this,
press and hold the two outside
buttons on the HomeLink
transceiver for about 25 seconds,
until the red indicator flashes.
Release the buttons, then proceed to
step 1.
If you are training the second or
third buttons, go directly to step 1.
Unplug the garage door opener
motor from the electrical outlet.
Holdtheendofthegaragedoor
opener remote transmitter 2 to 5
inches from HomeLink. Make
sure you are not blocking your
view of the red indicator in
HomeLink.
1.
2.
If equipped
CONTINUED
General Information
Training HomeLink
Important Safety Precautions
Before you begin
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
Features
181
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Press and hold the remote
transmitter button and one of the
HomeLink buttons at the same
time.
Press and hold the remote
transmitter button and one of the
HomeLink buttons at the same
time. While continuing to hold the
HomeLink button, press and
release the remote transmitter
button every 2 seconds.
If the red indicator in HomeLink
continues to flash slowly (does
not flash rapidly), your remote
transmitter may stop
transmitting after a short time.
Go to step 4.
PushandholdtheHomeLink
button for a few seconds, then
watch the red indicator on
HomeLink.
If the indicator stays on or
flashes slowly, repeat steps 2
thru 5.
If the indicator flashes rapidly
for 2 seconds then stays on, you
have a rolling code transmitter:
go to ‘‘Training with a Rolling
Code System’’ (see page ).
If the red indicator in HomeLink
begins to flash slowly at first,
then rapidly, release both
buttons, and go to step 5.
If the red indicator in HomeLink
begins to flash slowly at first,
then rapidly, release both
buttons, and go to step 5.
If the red indicator in HomeLink
continues to flash slowly (does
not begin to flash rapidly),
repeat steps 2 thru 4.
Plug in the garage door opener
motor, then test the HomeLink
button by pushing it for about 1
second.
If the button works,
programming is complete.
If the button does not work go
to step 6.
Repeat these steps to train the
other two HomeLink buttons to
operate any other compatible
remotely controlled device around
your home (lighting, automatic
gate, security system, etc.).
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
183
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
182
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Make sure you have properly
completed the ‘‘Training
HomeLink’’ procedure.
Find the ‘‘training’’ button on your
garage door opener unit. The
location will vary, depending on
the manufacturer.
Press and hold the button on
HomeLink for 3 to 4 seconds.
Press and hold the HomeLink
button again for 3 to 4 seconds.
This should turn off the training
indicator on the garage door
opener unit. (Some systems may
require you to press the button up
to three times.)
Press the HomeLink button again
for about 1 second. It should
operate the garage door.
The ‘‘Training HomeLink’’
procedure trains HomeLink to the
proper garage door opener code.
The following procedure
synchronizes HomeLink to the
garage door opener so it sends and
receives the correct codes.
For security purposes, newer garage
door opening systems use a ‘‘rolling’’
or variable code. Information from
the remote control and the garage
door opener are needed before
HomeLink can operate the garage
door opener.
Press the training button on the
garage door opener unit until the
indicator next to the button comes
on. The indicator may blink, or
comeonandstayon.Youthen
have approximately 30 seconds to
complete the following steps.
6.
2.
4.
5.
1.
3.
Training With a Rolling Code
System
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
Features
183
TRAINING BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Toerasethecodesstoredinallthree
buttons, press and hold the two
outside buttons until the red
indicator begins to flash, then
release the buttons.
Youshoulderaseallthreecodes
before selling the vehicle.
If you want to retrain a programmed
button for a new device, you do not
have to erase all button memory.
You can replace the existing memory
code using this procedure:
If a rolling code transmitter was
previously programmed, the
indicator will flash rapidly for 2
seconds, and then stay on for
about 23 seconds.
If a standard transmitter was
programmed, the indicator will
stay on for about 25 seconds.
Press and hold the HomeLink
button to be trained until the
HomeLink indicator begins to
flash slowly.
If you have problems with training
the HomeLink Universal Transceiver,
or would like information on home
products that can be operated by
HomeLink, call (800) 355-3515. On
the Internet, go to
www.homelink.com.
HomeLink
is a registered
trademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.
Once the HomeLink indicator
begins to flash slowly, continue to
hold the HomeLink button, and
follow steps 3 thru 6 under
‘‘Training HomeLink’’ (see page
).
1.
2.
181
Erasing Codes
Retraining a Button
Customer Assistance
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
184
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Before you begin driving your
vehicle, you should know what
gasoline to use and how to check the
levels of important fluids. You also
need to know how to properly store
luggage or packages. The
information in this section will help
you. If you plan to add any
accessories to your vehicle, please
read the information in this section
first.
.............................Break-in Period . 186
.................Fuel Recommendation . 186
.........Service Station Procedures . 187
....................................Refueling . 187
Opening and Closing the
.......................................Hood . 188
...................................Oil Check . 189
.............Engine Coolant Check . 190
...............................Fuel Economy . 190
...Accessories and Modifications . 191
.............................Carrying Cargo . 193
Before Driving
Before Driving
185
Main Menu
Help assure your vehicle’s future
reliability and performance by paying
extra attention to how you drive
during the first 600 miles (1,000 km).
During this period:
Avoid full-throttle starts and rapid
acceleration.
Do not change the oil until the
scheduled maintenance time.
Avoidhardbrakingforthefirst
200 miles (300 km).
Do not tow a trailer.
You should also follow these
recommendations with an
overhauled or exchanged engine, or
when the brakes are replaced.
In addition, in order to maintain good
performance, fuel economy, and
emissions control, we strongly
recommend, in areas where it is
available, the use of gasoline that
does NOT contain manganese-based
fuel additives such as MMT.
Your vehicle is designed to operate
on unleaded gasoline with a pump
octane number of 87 or higher. Use
of a lower octane gasoline can cause
a persistent, heavy metallic rapping
noise that can lead to engine damage.
We recommend using quality
gasolines containing detergent
additives that help prevent fuel
system and engine deposits.
Some gasoline today is blended with
oxygenates such as ethanol or
MTBE. Your vehicle is designed to
operate on oxygenated gasoline
containing up to 10 % ethanol by
volume and up to 15 % MTBE by
volume. Do not use gasoline
containing methanol.
Premium fuel is recommended when
towing in certain conditions (see
page ).
Use of gasoline with these additives
may adversely affect performance,
and cause the malfunction indicator
lamp on your instrument panel to
come on. If this happens, contact
your authorized dealer for service.
If you notice any undesirable
operating symptoms, try another
service station or switch to another
brand of gasoline.
For further important fuel-related
information, please refer to your
.
220
Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation
Break-in Period Fuel Recommendation
Quick Start Guide
186
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Open the fuel fill door by pulling
onthehandletotheleftofthe
driver’s seat.
Park with the driver’s side closest
to the service station pump.
Stop filling the tank after the fuel
nozzle automatically clicks off. Do
not try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank. Leave
some room for the fuel to expand
with temperature changes.
even though the tank is not full,
there may be a problem with your
vehicle’s fuel vapor recovery
system. The system helps keep
fuel vapor from going into the
atmosphere. Try filling at another
pump. If this does not fix the
problem, consult your dealer.
Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.
You may hear a hissing sound as
pressure inside the tank escapes.
The fuel fill cap is attached to the
fuel filler with a tether. Put the
attachment on the fuel fill cap into
the slit on the fuel fill door.
1.
2.
3. 4.
If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off
CONTINUED
Service Station Procedures
Refueling
Before Driving
187
Pull
Gasoline is highly flammable
and explosive. You can be
burned or seriously injured
when handling fuel.
Stop the engine, and keep
heat, sparks, and flame away.
Handle fuel only outdoors.
Wipe up spills immediately.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Put your fingers under the front
edge of the hood near the center.
Slide your hand to the left until
you feel the hood latch handle.
Push this handle up to release it.
Lift up the hood.
If the hood latch handle moves
stiffly, or if you can open the hood
without lifting the handle, the
mechanism should be cleaned and
lubricated.
Park the vehicle, and set the
parking brake. Pull the hood
release handle located under the
lower left corner of the dashboard.
The hood will pop up slightly.
Screw the fuel fill cap back on
until it clicks at least once. If you
do not properly tighten the cap,
the malfunction indicator lamp
maycomeon(seepage ).You
will also see a ‘‘CHECK FUEL
CAP’’ message on the information
display.
Push the fuel fill door closed until
it latches.
2.1.5.
6.
277
Service Station Procedures
Opening and Closing the Hood
188
LATCH
SLIT
ATTACHMENT
FUEL FILL CAP
HOOD RELEASE HANDLE
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Remove the dipstick again, and
check the level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks.
If it is near or below the lower mark,
see on page .
Wait a few minutes after turning the
engine off before you check the oil.
Remove the dipstick (orange loop).
Wipe off the dipstick with a clean
cloth or paper towel.
Insert the dipstick all the way back
into its hole.
Holding the grip, pull the support
rod out of its clip. Insert the end
into the designated hole in the
hood.
To close the hood, lift it up slightly to
remove the support rod from the
hole. Put the support rod back into
its holding clip. Lower the hood to
about a foot (30 cm) above the
fender, then let it drop. Make sure it
is securely latched.
1.
2.
3. 4.
3.
239
Service Station Procedures
Adding Engine Oil
Oil Check
Before Driving
189
DIPSTICK
UPPER MARK
LOWER MARK
SUPPORT ROD CLIP
GRIP
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Try to maintain a constant speed.
Everytimeyouslowdownand
speed up, your vehicle uses extra
fuel. Use cruise control when
appropriate.
Combine several short trips into
one.
The air conditioning puts an extra
load on the engine which makes it
usemorefuel.Usethefresh-air
ventilation when possible.
Always maintain your vehicle
according to the maintenance
messages displayed in the
information display. See
on page
.
Look at the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. Make sure it is
between the MAX and MIN lines. If
it is below the MIN line, see
on page for
information on adding the proper
coolant.
Refer to
on page for information
about checking other items on your
vehicle.
Always drive in the highest gear
possible.
Drive moderately. Rapid
acceleration, abrupt cornering,
and hard braking use more fuel.
The build-up of snow or mud on
your vehicle’s underside adds
weight and rolling resistance.
Frequent cleaning helps your fuel
mileage and reduces the chance of
corrosion.
an underinflated tire
causes more ‘‘rolling resistance,’’
which uses more fuel.
234
For example,
242
234
Service Station Procedures, Fuel Economy
Owner’s
Maintenance Checks
Engine Coolant Check
Adding
Engine Coola
nt
Owner’s Maintenance
Checks
190
RESERVE TANK
MAX
MIN
Improving Fuel Economy
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your dealer has Honda accessories
that allow you to personalize your
vehicle. These accessories have
been designed and approved for your
vehicle, and are covered by warranty.
When properly installed, cellular
phones, alarms, two-way radios, and
low-powered audio systems should
not interfere with your vehicle’s
computer controlled systems, such
as your airbags and anti-lock brakes.
Before installing any accessory:
Make sure the accessory does not
obscure any lights, or interfere
with proper vehicle operation or
performance.
Before installing any electronic
accessory, have the installer
contact your dealer for assistance.
If possible, have your dealer
inspect the final installation.
Modifying your vehicle, or installing
some non-Honda accessories, can
make it unsafe. Before you make any
modifications or add any accessories,
be sure to read the following
information.
Although non-Honda accessories
may fit on your vehicle, they may not
meet factory specifications, and
could adversely affect your vehicle’s
handling and stability.
Be sure electronic accessories do
not overload electrical circuits
(see page ) or interfere with
proper operation of your vehicle.
Do not install accessories on the
side pillars or across the rear
windows as these may interfere
with proper operation of the side
curtain airbags.
283
Accessories
Accessories and Modifications
Before Driving
191
Improper accessories or
modifications can affect your
vehicle’s handling, stability, and
performance, and cause a
crash in which you can be hurt
or killed.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding
accessories and modifications.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Removing parts from your vehicle,
or replacing components with
non-Honda components could
seriously affect your vehicle’s
handling, stability, and reliability.
Raising your vehicle with a
non-Honda suspension kit can
affect the handling and stability.
Herearesomeexamples:
Lowering your vehicle with a
non-Honda suspension kit that
significantly reduces ground
clearance can allow the
undercarriage to hit speed bumps
or other raised objects, which
could cause the airbags to deploy.
If you plan to modify your vehicle,
consult your dealer.
Modifying your steering wheel or
any other part of your vehicle’s
safety features can make the
systems ineffective.
Larger or smaller wheels and tires
can interfere with the operation of
your vehicle’s anti-lock brakes and
other systems.
Non-Honda wheels, because they
are a universal design, can cause
excessive stress on suspension
components and will not be
compatible with the tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS).
Modifying Your Vehicle
Accessories and Modifications
192
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your vehicle has several convenient
storage areas:
Glove box
Front door and seat-back pockets
Rear cargo area, including the
second and third row seats when
folded flat
Console compartment
Rear compartment
However, carrying too much cargo,
or improperly storing it, can affect
your vehicle’s handling, stability,
stopping distance, and tires, and
make it unsafe. Before carrying any
type of cargo, be sure to read the
following pages.
Carrying Cargo
Before Driving
193
GLOVE BOX
CARGO AREA
CONSOLE COMPARTMENT
DOOR POCKETS
SEAT-BACK POCKETS
REAR COMPARTMENT
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−×
Determine the combined weight
of the driver and passengers that
will be riding in your vehicle.
The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity.
Determine the combined weight
of luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle. That weight may
not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in step 4.
To determine the correct cargo and
luggage load limit:
If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer will
be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine
how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of
yourvehicle(seepage ).
In addition, the total weight of the
vehicle, all occupants, accessories,
cargo, and trailer tongue load must
not exceed the gross vehicle weight
rating (GVWR) or the gross axle
weight rating (GAWR). Both are on
a label on the driver’s doorjamb.
The maximum load for your vehicle
is 1,322 lbs (600 kg). This figure
includes the total weight of all
occupants, cargo, and accessories,
and the tongue load if you are towing
a trailer.
Locate the statement, ‘‘the
combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed 1,322
lbs ’’ on your vehicle’s placard.
(The placard is driver’s doorjamb.)
Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from
For example, if the maximum load
is 1,322 lbs and there will be eight
150 lb. passengers in your vehicle,
the amount of available cargo and
luggage load capacity is 122 lbs.
(1,322 750 (8 150) = 122 lbs.)
1.
2.
5.
6.
3.
4.
213
Load Limits
Carrying Cargo
194
Overloading or improper
loading can affect handling and
stability and cause a crash in
which you can be hurt or killed.
Follow all load limits and other
loading guidelines in this
manual.
1,322 lbs (600 kg).
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Store or secure all items that could
be thrown around and hurt
someone during a crash.
If you use an accessory roof rack,
the roof rack weight limit may be
lower. Refer to the information that
came with your roof rack.
Theseparationnetcanbeusedto
hold back soft, lightweight items
stored in the cargo area. Heavy
items should be properly secured on
the floor of the cargo area. The net
may not prevent heavy items from
being thrown forward in a crash or a
sudden stop.
Be sure items placed on the floor
behind the front seats cannot roll
under the seats and interfere with
the driver’s ability to operate the
pedals, the proper operation of the
seats, or proper operation of the
sensors under the seats.
Keep the glove box closed while
driving. If it is open, a passenger
could injure their knees during a
crash or sudden stop.
The cargo cover can be used to
cover the cargo area behind the third
row seats. When the third row seats
are folded down, the cargo cover can
be extended over the larger area. Do
not install the cover over the larger
area if the third row seats are not
folded down.
Ifyoufoldthesecondorthirdrow
seats down, tie down items that
could be thrown about the vehicle
during a crash or sudden stop.
Also, keep all cargo below the
bottom of the windows. If it is
higher, it could interfere with the
proper operation of the side
curtain airbags.
If you carry large items that
prevent you from closing the
tailgate, exhaust gas can enter the
passenger area. To avoid the
possibility of
, follow the instructions
on page .
Distribute cargo evenly on the
floor of the cargo area, placing the
heaviest items on the bottom and
as far forward as possible. Tie
down items that could be thrown
about the vehicle during a crash or
sudden stop.
If you carry any items on a roof
rack,besurethetotalweightof
the rack and the items does not
exceed 165 lbs (75 kg).
57
Carrying Cargo
Optional Separation Net
Optional Cargo Cover
Carrying Items in the Passenger
Compartment
carbon monoxide
poisoning
Carrying Cargo in the Cargo Area
Before Driving
195
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Thehooksoneachsideofthe
tailgate and on the underside of the
cargo area storage compartment lid
are for plastic grocery bags. To use
the hook on the storage
compartment lid, open the lid, and
attach the cord to one of the shafts
of the third seat center head
restraint.
You can use the cargo net to secure
items in the cargo area, and store
small items between the two halves
of the net. To install the cargo net,
hook the loops on the four corners of
the net to the tabs at both sides of
the tailgate sill.
If equipped
Carrying Cargo
Cargo Net
196
Main Menu
Table of Contents
This section gives you tips on
starting the engine under various
conditions, and how to operate the
automatic transmission. It also
includes important information on
parking your vehicle, the braking
system, the VTM-4 system (4WD
models only), the VSA system, the
tire pressure monitoring system, and
facts you need if you are planning to
tow a trailer.
........................Driving Guidelines . 198
.......................Starting the Engine . 199
..............Automatic Transmission . 200
..............................VTM-4 System . 204
Tire Pressure Monitoring
........................System (TPMS) . 205
..................................Parking Tips . 207
.............................Braking System . 208
...............Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) . 209
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)
........................................System . 211
.........................VSA Off Switch . 212
...........................Towing a Trailer . 213
......................Trailer Driving Tips . 219
Towing Your Vehicle Behind a
................................Motorhome . 221
Off-Highway Driving
..................................Guidelines . 222
Driving
Driving
197
Main Menu
Your vehicle has a higher ground
clearance that allows you to travel
over bumps, obstacles, and rough
terrain. It also provides good
visibility so you can anticipate
problems earlier.
Because your vehicle rides higher
off the ground, it has a high center
of gravity that can cause it to roll
over if you make abrupt turns. Utility
vehicles have a significantly higher
roll over rate than other types of
vehicles.
To prevent rollovers or loss of
control:
Take corners at slower speeds
than you would with a passenger
vehicle.
Avoid sharp turns and abrupt
maneuvers whenever possible.
Do not carry heavy cargo on the
roof.
Do not modify your vehicle in any
way that would raise the center of
gravity.
Check the adjustment of the
inside and outside mirrors (see
page ).
Check the seat adjustment (see
page ).
Check that any items you may be
carrying are stored properly or
fastened down securely.
Youshoulddothefollowingchecks
and adjustments before you drive
your vehicle.
Make sure all windows, mirrors,
and outside lights are clean and
unobstructed. Remove frost, snow,
or ice.
Visually check the tires. If a tire
looks low, use a gauge to check its
pressure (see page ).
Your vehicle is equipped with a four-
wheel drive (4WD) system. When
the system senses a loss of front-
wheel traction, it automatically
transfers some power to the rear
wheels. This gives you better
traction and mobility.
You still need to exercise the same
care when accelerating, steering, and
brakingthatyouwouldinatwo-
wheel drive vehicle.
3.
2.
1.
4.
5.
87
92
258
Four-wheel drive models
See page for additional driving off-
highway guidelines.
222
Driving Guidelines
Preparing to Drive
198
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If the engine does not start within
15 seconds, or starts but stalls
right away, repeat step 4 with the
accelerator pedal pressed halfway
down. If the engine starts, release
pressure on the accelerator pedal
so the engine does not race.
If the engine fails to start, press
the accelerator pedal all the way
down, and hold it there while
starting to clear flooding. If the
engine still does not start, return
to step 5.
Check the steering wheel
adjustment (see page ).
Make sure the doors and the
tailgate are securely closed and
locked.
Fasten your seat belt. Check that
your passengers have fastened
their seat belts (see page ).
When you start the engine, check
the gauges and indicators in the
instrument panel (see page ).
Without touching the accelerator
pedal, turn the ignition key to the
START (III) position. Do not hold
the key in the START (III)
position for more than 15 seconds
at a time. If the engine does not
start right away, pause for at least
10 seconds before trying again.
Make sure the shift lever is in
Park. Press on the brake pedal.
In cold weather, turn off all
electrical accessories to reduce
the drain on the battery.
Apply the parking brake.
5.
6.
1.
2.
3.
4.
78
61
15
6.
7.
8.
9.
79
Driving Guidelines, Starting the Engine
Starting theEngine
Driving
199
The engine is harder to start in cold
weather. Also, the thinner air found at
altitudes above 8,000 feet (2,400
meters) adds to this problem.
The immobilizer system protects your
vehicle from theft. If an improperly-
coded key (or other device) is used, the
engine’s fuel system is disabled. For
more information, see page .
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If the malfunction indicator lamp
comes on along with the ‘‘D’’
indicator, there is a problem with the
automatic transmission control
system. Avoid rapid acceleration, and
have the transmission checked by
your dealer as soon as possible.
These indicators on the instrument
panel show which position the shift
lever is in.
The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for a
few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. If it flashes while driving (in
any shift position), it indicates a
possible problem in the transmission.
To shift from Park to any position,
pressfirmlyonthebrakepedal,and
pull the shift lever toward you. You
cannot shift out of Park when the
ignition switch is in the LOCK (0) or
ACCESSORY (I) position.
Automatic Transmission
Shift Lever Position Indicators Shifting
200
SHIFT LEVER
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
To shift from:
PtoR
RtoP
NtoR
Dto2
2to1
1to2
2toD
DtoD
DtoN
DtoD
NtoD
RtoN
Do this:
Press the brake pedal and
pull the shift lever towards
you.
Pull the shift lever towards
you.
Move the shift lever.
3
3
3
3
Use neutral if you
need to restart a stalled engine, or if
it is necessary to stop briefly with
the engine idling. Shift to the Park
position if you need to leave your
vehicle for any reason. Press on the
brake pedal when you are moving
the shift lever from neutral to
another gear.
Use this position for
your normal driving. The
transmission automatically selects a
suitable gear for the vehicle speed
and acceleration. You may notice the
transmission shifting up at higher
speeds when the engine is cold. This
helps the engine warm up faster.
This position mechani-
cally locks the transmission. Use
Park whenever you are turning off or
starting the engine. To shift out of
Park, you must press on the brake
pedal and have your foot off the
accelerator pedal. Pull the shift lever
towards you, then move it out of
Park.
Press the brake
pedal and pull the shift lever towards
you to shift from Park to reverse. To
shift from reverse to neutral, come
to a complete stop and then shift.
If you have done all of the above and
still cannot move the lever out of
Park, see on
page .
To avoid transmission damage, come
to a complete stop before shifting
into Park. The shift lever must be in
Park before you can remove the key
from the ignition switch.
203
CONTINUED
Neutral (N)
Drive (D)
Park (P)
Reverse (R)
Shift Lock Release
Automatic Transmission
Driving
201
Main Menu
Table of Contents
− −−This position is similar
to D, except only the first three
gears are selected. Use D to provide
engine braking when going down a
steep hill. D can also keep the
transmission from cycling between
third and fourth gears in stop-and-go
driving.
If you exceed the maximum speed
for the gear you are in, the engine
speed will enter into the tachometer’s
red zone. If this occurs, you may feel
the engine cut in and out. This is
caused by a limiter in the engine’s
computer controls. The engine will
run normally when you reduce the
rpm below the red zone.
This position locks the
transmission in first gear. By
upshifting and downshifting through
1, 2, D , and D, you can operate the
transmission much like a manual
transmission without a clutch pedal.
This position locks
thetransmissioninsecondgear.It
does not downshift to first gear
when you come to a stop.
Use second gear:
For more power when climbing.
To increase engine braking when
going down steep hills.
For starting out on a slippery
surface or in deep snow.
When driving downhill with a
trailer.
To help reduce wheel spin.
3
3
3
Automatic Transmission
Drive (D )
Engine Speed Limiter
First (1)Second (2)
3
202
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Do this if pushing on the brake pedal
and pulling the shift lever does not
shift the transmission out of Park:
Set the parking brake.
Push down on the key while you
pull the shift lever towards you
and move it out of Park to neutral.
Remove the key from the shift
lock release slot, then install the
cover. Press the brake pedal, and
restart the engine.
Put a cloth on the edge of the shift
lock release slot cover. Using a
small flat-tipped screwdriver or a
metal fingernail file, carefully pry
on the edge of the cover to remove
it.
Insert the key in the shift lock
release slot.
Remove the key from the ignition
switch.
If you need to use the shift lock
release, it means your vehicle is
developing a problem. Have the
vehicle checked by your dealer.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.
2.
Shift Lock Release
Automatic Transmission
Driving
203
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The vehicle must be stopped with
the engine running.
do
any of the following:
Press the VTM-4 LOCK button.
Move the shift lever to D or D .
Move the shift lever to first (1),
second (2), or reverse (R) gear.
Turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position.
Press the VTM-4 LOCK button.
The indicator in the button comes
on.
The VTM-4 Lock will temporarily
disengage when the vehicle speed
exceeds 18 mph (30 km/h). The
indicator in the button will remain on.
The variable torque management
4WD (VTM-4) system automatically
transfers varying amounts of engine
torque to the rear wheels under
lower traction conditions.
If more traction is needed when your
vehicle is stuck, or is likely to
become stuck, you can use the
VTM-4 LOCK button to increase
torque to the rear wheels.
To get unstuck, apply light pressure
to the accelerator pedal. Do not spin
the front tires for more than a few
seconds. Because of the amount of
torque applied to the rear tires, they
should not spin. This is normal. If
you are not able to move the vehicle,
stop and reverse direction.
1.
2.
3.
3
To Engage the VTM-4 Lock To Disengage the VTM-4 Lock,
VTM-4 System
204
Do not continuously spin the front tires
of your vehicle. Continuously spinning
the front tires can cause transmission
or rear differential damage.
Do not use the VTM-4 LOCK button on
dry, paved roads. Driving on dry,
paved roads with VTM-4 Lock ON may
damage the rear differential when
making a turn. Strange noise and
vibration can also result.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your vehicle is equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that turns on every time you start the
engine and monitors the pressure in
your tires while driving.
Each tire has its own pressure
sensor. If the air pressure of a tire
becomes significantly low, the
sensor in that tire immediately sends
a signal that causes the low tire
pressure indicator and the
appropriate tire on the tire pressure
monitor to come on.
Each tire, including the spare, should
be checked monthly when cold and
set to the recommended inflation
pressure as specified in the vehicle
placard and this owner’s manual (see
page ).
Although your tire pressure is
monitored, you must manually check
thetirepressuresmonthly.
If you think you can safely drive a
short distance to a service station,
proceed slowly, and inflate the tire to
the recommended pressure shown
on the driver’s doorjamb.
When the tire pressure monitoring
system warning indicator is on, one
or more of your tires is significantly
under-inflated. You should stop and
check your tires as soon as possible,
and inflate them to the proper
pressureasindicatedonthevehicle’s
tire information placard.
If the tire is flat, or if the tire
pressure is too low to continue
driving, replace the tire with the
compact spare tire.
Driving on a significantly under-
inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
289
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Low Tire Pressure
Indicator
Driving
205
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The appropriate tire indicator and
low tire pressure indicator comes on
if a tire becomes significantly
underinflated. See
on page .
This indicator comes on and stays on
if there is a problem with the tire
pressure monitoring system.
If you see this message, the system
is off and is not monitoring the tire
pressures. Have the system checked
by your dealer as soon as possible.
If you have a flat tire, the low tire
pressure and tire monitor indicators
will come on. Replace the indicated
flat tire with the compact spare tire
(see page ).
Each wheel is equipped with a tire
pressure sensor mounted inside the
tire behind the valve stem. You must
use TPMS specific wheels. It is
recommended that you always have
your tires serviced by your dealer or
qualified technician.
After you replace the flat tire, the
low tire pressure indicator stays on.
This is normal; the system is not
monitoring the spare tire pressure.
Manually check the spare tire
pressure to be sure it is correct.
Never use a puncture-repairing agent
in a flat tire. If used, you will have to
replace the tire pressure sensor.
Havetheflattirerepairedbyyour
dealer as soon as possible.
266
205
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Tire Pressure Monitor
Low Tire
Pressure Indicator
Changing a Tire with TPMS
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) Indicator
206
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Set the parking brake before you put
the transmission in Park. This keeps
the vehicle from moving and putting
pressure on the parking mechanism
in the transmission.
If the vehicle is facing downhill,
turn the front wheels toward the
curb and set the parking brake.
If the vehicle is facing uphill, turn
the front wheels away from the
curb and set the parking brake.
Always use the parking brake when
you park your vehicle. Make sure
the parking brake is set firmly or
your vehicle may roll if it is on an
incline.
Make sure the moonroof (if
equipped) and the windows are
closed.
Turn off the lights.
Place any packages, valuables, etc.
in the cargo area or take them
with you.
Lock the doors.
Check the indicator on the driver’s
door to verify that the security
system is set.
Never park over dry leaves, tall
grass, or other flammable
materials. The hot three way
catalytic converter could cause
these materials to catch on fire.
On vehicles with security system
Parking Tips
Driving
207
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Check the brakes after driving
through deep water. Apply the
brakes moderately to see if they feel
normal. If not, apply them gently and
frequently until they do. Be extra
cautious in your driving.
Resting your foot on the pedal keeps
the brakes applied lightly, builds up
heat, and reduces their effectiveness.
It also keeps your brake lights on all
the time, confusing drivers behind
you.
Constant application of the brakes
when going down a long hill builds
up heat and reduces their effective-
ness. Use the engine to assist the
brakes by taking your foot off the
accelerator and downshifting to a
lower gear.
Your vehicle is equipped with disc
brakes at all four wheels. A power
assist helps reduce the effort needed
on the brake pedal. The anti-lock
brake system (ABS) helps you retain
steering control when braking very
hard.
The hydraulic system that operates
the brakes has two separate circuits.
Each circuit works diagonally across
the vehicle (the left-front brake is
connected with the right-rear brake,
etc.). If one circuit should develop a
problem, you will still have braking
at two wheels.
Braking System Design
Braking System
208
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If the brake pads need replacing, you
will hear a distinctive, metallic
screeching sound when you apply
the brake pedal. If you do not have
the brake pads replaced, they will
screech all the time. It is normal for
the brakes to occasionally squeal or
squeak when you apply them.
The anti-lock brake system (ABS)
helps prevent the brakes from
locking up, and helps you retain
steering control by pumping the
brakes rapidly, much faster than a
person can do it.
The ABS also balances the front-to-
rear braking distribution according
to vehicle loading.
Let the ABS work for you by always
keeping firm, steady pressure on the
brake pedal. This is sometimes
referred to as ‘‘stomp and steer.’’
You will feel a pulsation in the brake
pedal when the ABS activates, and
you may hear some noise. This is
normal: it is the ABS rapidly
pumpingthebrakes.Ondry
pavement, you will need to press on
thebrakepedalveryhardbeforethe
ABS activates. However, you may
feel the ABS activate immediately if
you are trying to stop on snow or ice.
You should never pump the brake pedal.
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)Brake Wear Indicators
Braking System, Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
Driving
209
Main Menu
Table of Contents
such as trying to take a
corner too fast or making a sudden
lane change. Always drive at a safe
speed for the road and weather
conditions.
Always steer moderately
when you are braking hard. Severe
or sharp steering wheel movement
can still cause your vehicle to veer
into oncoming traffic or off the road.
If this indicator comes on, the anti-
lock function of the braking system
has shut down. The brakes still work
like a conventional system, but
without anti-lock. You should have
your dealer inspect your vehicle as
soon as possible.
If the ABS indicator and the brake
system indicator come on together,
and the parking brake is fully
released, the front-to-rear braking
distribution system may also be shut
down.
Test your brakes as instructed on
page . If the brakes feel normal,
drive slowly and have your vehicle
repaired by your dealer as soon as
possible. Avoid sudden hard braking
which could cause the rear wheels to
lock up and possibly lead to a loss of
control.
It only helps with steering
control during braking.
on loose or
uneven surfaces, such as gravel or
snow, than a vehicle without anti-
lock.
278
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
ABS will not prevent a skid that
results from changing direction
abruptly,
ABS cannot prevent a loss of
stability.
ABS Indicator Important Safety Reminders
ABS does not reduce the time or
distance it takes to stop the
vehicle.
A vehicle with ABS may require a
longer distance to stop
210
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The vehicle stability assist (VSA)
system helps to stabilize the vehicle
during cornering if the vehicle turns
more or less than desired. It also
assists you in maintaining traction
while accelerating on loose or
slippery road surfaces. It does this
by regulating the engine’s output,
and by selectively applying the
brakes.
When VSA activates, you may notice
that the engine does not respond to
the accelerator in the same way it
does at other times.
The VSA system cannot enhance the
vehicle’s driving stability in all
situations and does not control your
vehicle’s entire braking system. It is
still your responsibility to drive and
corner at reasonable speeds and to
leave a sufficient margin of safety.
When VSA activates, you will see the
VSA activation indicator blink.
If the VSA system indicator comes
on while driving, pull to the side of
theroadwhenitissafe,andturnoff
the engine. Reset the system by
restarting the engine. If the VSA
system indicator stays, or comes
back on while driving, have the VSA
system inspected by your dealer.
If the indicator does not come on
when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON (II) position, there may be a
problem with the VSA system. Have
your dealer inspect your vehicle as
soon as possible (see page ).
Without VSA, your vehicle will have
normal braking and cornering ability,
but it will not have VSA traction and
stability enhancement.
64
VSA Activation Indicator VSA System Indicator
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System
Driving
211
Main Menu
Table of Contents
VSA is turned on every time you
start the engine, even if you turned it
off the last time you drove the
vehicle.
Driving with varying tire or wheel
sizes may cause the VSA to
malfunction. When replacing tires,
make sure they are of the same size
and type as your original tires (see
page ).
Deactivate the VSA system if you
need to drive with the compact spare
tire installed (see page ).
If you install winter tires, make sure
they are the same size as those that
were originally supplied with your
vehicle. Exercise the same caution
during winter driving as you would if
your vehicle was not equipped with
VSA.
In certain unusual conditions when
your vehicle gets stuck in shallow
mud or fresh snow, it may be easier
to free it with the VSA temporarily
switched off. When the VSA system
is off, the traction control system is
alsooff.Youshouldonlyattemptto
free your vehicle with the VSA off if
you are not able to free it when the
VSA is on.
Immediately after freeing your
vehicle, be sure to switch the VSA on
again. We do not recommend driving
your vehicle with the VSA and
traction control systems switched off.
When VSA is off, the VSA activation
indicator comes on as a reminder.
This switch is under the left vent.
Press it to turn the vehicle stability
assist system on and off.
258
266
VSA and Tire Sizes
VSA Off Switch
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System
212
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The maximum
weight of the trailer and everything
in or on it depends on the number of
occupants in your vehicle and the
type of trailer being towed (see page
).
Towing a load that is too heavy can
seriously affect your vehicle’s
handling and performance.
Theweightthatthe
tongue of a fully loaded trailer puts
on the hitch should be 5 to 10
percent of the total trailer weight for
boat trailers, and 8 to 15 percent of
total trailer weight for all other
trailers. (See page for limits for
your towing situation). Too much
tongue load reduces front-tire
traction and steering control. Too
little tongue load can make the
trailer unstable and cause it to sway.
Your vehicle has been designed to
tow a trailer, as well as carrying
passengers and their cargo. To
safely tow a trailer, you should
carefully observe the load limits (see
page ), use the proper equipment,
and follow the guidelines in this
section.
Be sure to read the
sectiononpage
if you plan to tow off paved
surfaces.
215
215
222
194
Load Limits
Off-Highway
Driving Guidelines
Towing a Trailer
Total Trailer Weight: Tongue Load:
Driving
213
Exceeding any load limit or
improperly loading your vehicle
and trailer can cause a crash in
which you can be seriously hurt
or killed.
Check the loading of your
vehicle and trailer carefully
beforestartingtodrive.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
Thebestwaytoconfirmthatall
loads are within limits is to check
them at a public scale.
The maximum
allowable weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, all cargo and the tongue
load is 5,950 lbs (2,700 kg).
The maximum
allowable weight on the vehicle axles
is 2,865 lbs (1,300 kg) on the front
axle, and 3,155 lbs (1,430 kg) on the
rear axle.
The maximum
allowable weight of the fully loaded
vehicle and trailer is 9,700 lbs (4,400
kg) with the proper hitch and fluid
coolers (see page ).
The GCWR must be reduced 2
percent for every 1,000 feet (305
meters) of elevation.
Connect the fully loaded trailer to
the hitch.
Measure again from the ground to
the same spot on the bottom of the
hitch.
Subtract the second measurement
from the first measurement, then
refer to the following table.
Ifthedifferenceismorethan3¾
inch, you have too much load on the
tongue. Redistribute the load or
remove cargo as needed.
1½’’
2¼’’
3’’
3¾’’
150 lbs (68 kg)
250 lbs (114 kg)
350 lbs (160 kg)
450 lbs (205 kg)
Measure from the ground to the
bottom of the trailer hitch.
Park the vehicle on level ground.
For public scales in your area, check
your local phone book, or contact
your trailer dealer or rental agency
for assistance.
To help ensure a safe drive to a scale,
or if you cannot get to a public scale,
we recommend that you estimate
your total trailer weight and tongue
load as described.
Add the weight of your trailer (as
quoted by the manufacturer) with
everything in or on the trailer. Then
check the tables on page to
make sure you do not exceed the
limit for your conditions.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
217 215
Estimating LoadsGross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR)
Gross Axle Weight Ratings
(GAWR)
Gross Combined Weight Rating
(GCWR)
If the
difference is:
Estimated
tongue load is:
Towing a Trailer
To Estimate the Tongue Load
To Estimate the Total Trailer Weight
214
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Number of
Occupants
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Number of
Occupants
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Equipped with transmission cooler and power steering fluid cooler.
Towing is Not Recommended
Equipped with transmission cooler and power steering fluid cooler.
Towing is Not Recommended
Maximum Total Trailer Weight
Maximum Total Trailer Weight
Maximum Tongue Load
Maximum Tongue Load
Towing a Trailer
Driving
215
Total Trailer Weight and Tongue Load Limits:
BOAT TRAILERS
OTHER TYPES OF TRAILERS
The corresponding weight limits assume occupants fill seats from the front of the vehicle to the back, each occupant weighs 150 lbs (70 kg) and each has 15 lbs (7 kg)
of luggage in the cargo area.
4,500 lbs (2,045 kg)
4,500 lbs (2,045 kg)
4,500 lbs (2,045 kg)
4,300 lbs (1,945 kg)
4,100 lbs (1,855 kg)
2,000 lbs (905 kg)
3,500 lbs (1,590 kg)
3,500 lbs (1,590 kg)
3,300 lbs (1,490 kg)
3,100 lbs (1,400 kg)
2,700 lbs (1,220 kg)
1,200 lbs (540 kg)
450 lbs (205 kg)
450 lbs (205 kg)
450 lbs (205 kg)
350 lbs (160 kg)
220 lbs (100 kg)
100 lbs (45 kg)
450 lbs (205 kg)
450 lbs (205 kg)
450 lbs (205 kg)
350 lbs (160 kg)
220 lbs (100 kg)
100 lbs (45 kg)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To accurately check your loads at
the public scale, the vehicle and
trailer should be fully loaded, and all
occupants should stay in the vehicle
while the attendant watches the
scale.
Check the front gross axle weight.
Limit: 2,865 lbs (1,300 kg)
Check the gross vehicle weight.
Limit: 5,950 lbs (2,700 kg)
If you cannot weigh the rear axle
directly, you can calculate the rear
gross axle weight by subtracting
the weight in step 1 from the
weight in step 2.
Limit: 3,086 lbs (1,400 kg)
Check the gross combined weight.
Limit: 9,700 lbs (4,400 kg)
Remember, maximum gross
combined weight should be
decreased 2 % for every 1,000 feet
(305 meters) of elevation.
Check the weight of the hitched
trailer. Write this number down.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Towing a Trailer
Checking Loads
216
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Check the weight of the unhitched
trailer. Limit: See page .
Towing generally requires a variety
of supplemental equipment. To
ensure the best quality, we
recommend that you purchase
Honda equipment whenever possible.
Your dealer offers a trailer package
that includes a hitch, a ball mount, a
wiring harness, a heavy-duty
transmission fluid cooler, and a
heavy-duty power steering fluid
cooler.
Discuss any additional needs with
your trailer sales or rental agency,
and make sure all equipment is
properly installed, maintained, and
also meets state, federal, province,
and local regulations.
Calculate the tongue load.
Subtract the weight in Step 5 from
the weight in step 6.
Limit: See page .
Range: 5-10% of total trailer weight
for boat trailers
8-15% of total trailer weight
for other trailers
We strongly recommend that you
have your dealer install a Honda
hitch. Using non-Honda equipment
may result in serious damage to your
vehicle.
To help prevent overheating, a
heavy-duty transmission fluid cooler
and a heavy-duty power steering
fluid cooler are required for trailer
towing. These coolers are available
only from your dealer.
A weight distributing hitch is not
recommended for use with your
vehicle, as an improperly adjusted
weight distributing hitch may reduce
handling, stability, and braking
performance.
6.
7.
215
215
CONTINUED
Towing Equipment and
Accessories
Towing a Trailer
Hitch
Transmission Fluid Cooler and
Power Steering Fluid Cooler
Weight Distributing Hitch
Driving
217
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Honda requires that any trailer with
a total trailer weight of 1,000 lbs (455
kg) or more has its own brakes.
There are two common types of
trailer brakes: surge and electric.
Surge brakes are common for boat
trailers, since the brakes will get wet.
If you choose electric brakes, be
sure they are electronically actuated.
Do not attempt to tap into your
vehicle’s hydraulic system. No
matter how successful it may seem,
any attempt to attach trailer brakes
to your vehicles hydraulic system
will lower braking effectiveness and
create a potential hazard.
Always use safety chains when you
tow a trailer. Make sure the chains
are secured to the trailer and hitch,
and that they cross under the tongue
and can catch the trailer if it
becomes unhitched. Leave enough
slack to allow the trailer to turn
corners easily, but do not let the
chains drag on the ground.
This device is recommended if your
trailer tends to sway. Your trailer
maker can tell you what kind of sway
control you need and how to install it.
Many states and provinces require
special exterior mirrors when towing
a trailer. Even if they don’t, you
should install special mirrors if you
cannot clearly see behind you, or if
the trailer creates a blind spot.
When towing a trailer, we
recommend that you carry a full-size
spare wheel and tire for your vehicle
and trailer. See page for proper
tire size, page for how to store a
full size wheel and tire, and page
for information on changing a
flat tire.
Remember to unhitch the trailer
before changing a flat. Ask your
trailer sales or rental agency where
and how to store the trailer’s spare
tire.
Seeyourtrailerdealerorrental
agency for more information on
installing electric brakes.
267
258
270
Towing a Trailer
Trailer Brakes Safety Chains
Sway Control
Trailer Mirrors
Spare Tires
218
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To get to your vehicle’s trailer
lighting connector, open the tailgate,
remove the cargo cover, then
remove the rear panel trim. The
connector is on the left side.
Trailer lights and equipment must
comply with federal, state, province,
and local regulations. Check trailer
light requirements for the areas
where you plan to tow, and use only
equipment designed for your vehicle.
Your vehicle is equipped with a
connector to install a trailer lighting
connector that mates with your
vehicle.
Refer to the above illustration for
wiring information.
We recommend that you have your
dealer install a Honda wiring harness
and converter. This harness has
been designed for your vehicle.
Since lighting and wiring vary with
trailer type and brand, you should
also have a qualified mechanic install
a suitable connector between the
vehicleandthetrailer.
Improper equipment or installation
can cause damage to your vehicle’s
electrical system and affect your
vehicle warranty.
When preparing to tow, and before
driving away, be sure to check the
following:
The vehicle has been properly
serviced, and the tires, brakes,
suspension, cooling system, and
lights are in good operating
condition.
The trailer has been properly
serviced and is in good condition.
All weights and loads are within
limits.
Thehitch,safetychains,andany
other attachments are secure.
All items in or on the trailer are
properly secured and cannot shift
while you drive.
CONTINUED
Towing a Trailer, Trailer Driving Tips
Driving
219
GROUND
(BLACK)
LEFT TURN SIGNAL
(GREEN/WHITE)
RIGHT TURN SIGNAL
(GREEN/YELLOW)
BRAKE LIGHT
(WHITE/BLACK)
TAILLIGHT
(RED/BLACK)
BATTERY POWER
(YELLOW)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your vehicle tires and spare are
properly inflated, and the trailer
tires and spare are inflated as
recommended by the trailer
maker.
Towing performance can be
affected by high altitude, high
temperature, or when climbing
steep grades. Therefore, premium
fuel (premium unleaded gasoline
with pump octane number of 91 or
higher) is recommended when
towing more than 3,500 lbs (1,590
kg).
The added weight, length, and
height of a trailer will affect your
vehicle’s handling and performance,
so driving with a trailer requires
some special driving skills and
techniques.
Foryoursafetyandthesafetyof
others,taketimetopracticedriving
maneuvers before heading for the
open road, and follow the guidelines
below.
Avoid towing a trailer during your
vehicle’s first 600 miles (1,000 km)
(see page ).
Drive slower than normal in all
driving situations, and obey posted
speed limits for vehicles with trailers.
When towing a fixed-sided trailer
(e.g., camper), do not exceed 55 mph
(88 km/h). At higher speeds, the
trailer may sway or affect vehicle
handling.
To prevent the transmission from
shifting frequently, drive in the D
position.
Maketurnsmoreslowlyandwider
than normal. The trailer tracks a
smaller arc than your vehicle, and it
canhitorrunoversomethingthe
vehicle misses. Allow more time and
distance for braking. Do not brake or
turn suddenly as this could cause the
trailer to jackknife or turn over.
When climbing hills, closely watch
your temperature gauge. If it nears
the red (Hot) mark, turn the air
conditioning off, reduce speed and, if
necessary, pull to the side of the
road to let the engine cool.
If the automatic transmission shifts
frequently while going up a hill, shift
to D .
186
3
Trailer Driving Tips
Driving Safely With a Trailer
Break-In Period
Towing Speeds and Gears
Making Turns and Braking
Driving on Hills
220
Main Menu
Table of Contents
When driving down hills, reduce
your speed and shift down to D . Do
not ‘‘ride’’ the brakes.
If you must stop when facing uphill,
use the foot brake or parking brake.
Do not try to hold the vehicle in
placebypressingontheaccelerator,
as this can cause the automatic
transmission to overheat.
Crosswinds and air turbulence
caused by passing trucks can disrupt
your steering and cause trailer to
sway. When being passed by a large
vehicle, keep a constant speed, and
steer straight ahead. Do not try to
make quick steering or braking
corrections.
Always drive slowly and have
someone guide you when backing up.
Grip the of the steering
wheel; then turn the wheel to the left
to get the trailer to move to the left,
andturnthewheelrighttomovethe
trailer to the right.
Follow all normal precautions when
parking, including putting the
transmission in Park and firmly
setting the parking brake. Also, place
wheel chocks at each of the trailer’s
tires.
If the vehicle’s tires slip when
retrieving a boat from the water,
shift to first gear, and turn on VTM-4
lock (see page ). Disengage
VTM-4 lock as soon as the boat is
out of the water to prevent damage
to the VTM-4 system.
Your vehicle is not designed to be
towed behind a motor home. If your
vehicle needs to be towed in an
emergency, see page .
204
279
3
bottom
Remember, it
takes longer to slow down and
stop when towing a trailer.
Towing Your Vehicle
Handling Crosswinds and Buff eting
Backing Up
Parking
Retrieving a Boat
Trailer Driving Tips, Towing Your Vehicle Behind a Motorhome
Driving
221
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To avoid loss of control or rollover,
be sure to follow all precautions and
recommendations.
Be aware that a heavy load can
reduce ground clearance and your
ability to clear obstacles.
Keep your speed low, and never
go faster than the conditions
allow.
It’s up to you to continually assess
the situation and drive within the
limits.
Your vehicle has been designed
primarily for use on pavement. But
its higher ground clearance allows
you to occasionally travel on unpaved
roads, such as campgrounds, picnic
sites, and similar locations. It is not
designed for trail-blazing, mountain
climbing, or other challenging off-
road activities.
Be sure to store cargo properly,
and do not exceed your vehicle
cargo load limits (see pages
and ).
Whenever you drive, make sure
you and your passengers always
wear seat belts.
If you decide to drive on unpaved
roads, you will find that it requires
somewhat different driving skills.
Your vehicle will also handle
somewhat differently than it does on
pavement. Be sure to pay extra
attention to the precautions and tips
in this section, and get acquainted
with your vehicle before leaving the
pavement.
194 213
Important Safety Precautions
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines
222
Improperly operating this
vehicle on or off-pavement can
cause an accident or rollover in
which you and your passengers
could be seriously injured or
killed.
Follow all instructions and
guidelines in this owner’s
manual.
Keep your speed low, and
don’t drive faster than
conditions permit.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Before you leave the pavement, be
sure to do all scheduled maintenance
and service, and inspect your vehicle
for any problems. Pay special
attention to the condition of the tires,
and check the tire pressures.
After you return to the pavement,
carefully inspect your vehicle to
make sure there is no damage that
could make driving it unsafe.
Recheck the condition of the tires
and the tire pressures.
The route presents limits (too steep
or bumpy roads). You have limits
(driving skill and comfort). And your
vehicle has limits (traction, stability,
and power).
Driving off-highway can be
hazardous if you fail to recognize
limits and take the proper
precautions.
Forbettertractiononallsurfaces,
accelerate slowly and gradually build
up speed. If you try to start too fast
on wet soil, mud, snow, or ice, you
might not have enough traction to
get underway, and you may dig
yourself a hole. Starting with the
shift lever in second (2) gear will
help you have a smoother start on
snow or ice.
Debris in the road can damage your
suspension or other components.
Because your vehicle has a high
center of gravity, driving over a large
obstacle, or allowing a wheel to drop
into a deep hole can cause your
vehicle to tip or roll over.
If you can’t clearly see all conditions
or obstacles on a slope, walk the
slope before you drive on it. If you
have any doubt whether or not you
can safely drive on the slope, don’t
do it. Find another route.
If you are driving up a hill and find
that you cannot continue,
. Your vehicle could roll
over. Slowly back down the hill,
following the same route you took up
the hill.
Keep in mind that you will usually
need more time and distance to
brake to a stop on unpaved surfaces.
Avoid hard braking. Do not ‘‘pump’’
the brakes; let the anti-lock braking
system pump them for you.
do not try to
turn around
Check Out Your Vehicle
Remember
Accelerating and Braking Avoiding Obstacles
Driving on Slopes
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines
Driving
223
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you get stuck, engage the VTM-4
Lock (see page ). Carefully try to
go in the direction (forward or
reverse) that you think will get you
unstuck. Do not spin the tires at high
speeds. It will not help you get out
and may cause damage to the
transmission or VTM-4 system.
If you are still unable to free yourself,
your vehicle is equipped with front
and rear tow hooks designed for this
purpose.
Before driving through water, stop,
get out if necessary, and make sure
that:
The water is not deep enough to
cover your wheel hubs, axles, or
exhaust pipe. You could stall and
not be able to restart your engine.
The water can also damage
important vehicle components.
The banks are sloped so you can
drive out.
The water is not flowing too fast.
Deep rushing water can sweep you
downstream. Even very shallow
rushingwatercanwashthe
ground from under your tires and
cause you to lose traction and
possibly roll over.
The banks and surface under the
water provide good traction. The
water may hide hazards such as
rocks, holes, or mud.
If you decide it is safe to drive
through water, choose a suitable
speed and engage the VTM-4 Lock.
Proceed without shifting or changing
speeds, and do not stop the vehicle
or shut off the engine.
After driving through water, test
your brakes. If they got wet, gently
‘‘pump’’ them while driving slowly
until they operate normally.
If the water is deeper than the wheel
hubs, some additional service may
be required. This service is not
covered by your warranties. Use a nylon strap to attach your
vehicle to the recovery vehicle, and
carefully take out the slack in the
strap. Once the strap is tight, the
recovery vehicle should apply force.
Remember that the recovery vehicle
needs good traction to avoid
becoming stuck, too.
204
If You Get StuckCrossing a Stream
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines
224
Main Menu
Table of Contents
You should never use a jack to try to
get unstuck. Your vehicle could
easily slip off the jack and hurt you
or someone else.
You may be able to safely tow a
lightweight trailer (such as a
motorcycle or small tent trailer) off-
road if you follow these guidelines.
Do not exceed 1,000 lbs (450 kg)
or a tongue weight of 100 lbs (45
kg).
Stay on smooth, level dirt roads,
and avoid driving in hilly terrain.
Allow extra room for starting,
stopping, and turning.
Slow down if you encounter bumps
or other obstacles.
Towing a Trailer Off-Road
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines
Driving
225
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Main Menu
If you have the skills and tools to
perform more complex maintenance
tasks on your vehicle, you may want
to purchase the service manual. See
page for information on how to
obtain a copy, or see your dealer.
This section also includes
instructions on how to read the
maintenance messages in the
information display, a maintenance
record, and instructions for simple
maintenance tasks you may want to
take care of yourself.
This section explains why it is
important to keep your vehicle well
maintained and how to follow basic
maintenance safety precautions.
......................Maintenance Safety . 228
....................Maintenance Minder . 229
....................Maintenance Record . 236
..............................Fluid Locations . 238
........................Adding Engine Oil . 239
.........Changing the Oil and Filter . 240
..............................Engine Coolant . 242
....................Windshield Washers . 243
....Automatic Transmission Fluid . 244
..............................Differential Oil . 245
....................................Timing Belt . 245
....................................Brake Fluid . 246
....................Power Steering Fluid . 247
.............................................Lights . 248
.....................................Floor Mats . 254
.......................Cleaning Seat Belts . 254
.................................Wiper Blades . 255
...........................................Wheels . 257
...............................................Tires . 257
...................Checking the Battery . 262
.............................Vehicle Storage . 263
305
Maintenance
Maintenance
227
Main Menu
To eliminate potential hazards, read
the instructions before you begin,
and make sure you have the tools
and skills required.
To clean parts, use a commercially
available degreaser or parts
cleaner, not gasoline.
To reduce the possibility of fire or
explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks,
and flames away from the battery
and all fuel-related parts.
Wear eye protection and
protective clothing when working
with the battery or compressed air. Do
not run the engine unless
instructed to do so.
Some of the most important safety
precautions are given here. However,
we cannot warn you of every
conceivable hazard that can arise in
performing maintenance. Only you
can decide whether or not you
should perform a given task.
All service items not detailed in this
section should be performed by a
certified technician or qualified
mechanic.
Make sure your vehicle is parked
on level ground, the parking brake
is set, and the engine is off.
Be sure there is
adequate ventilation whenever you
operate the engine.
Let the
engine and exhaust system cool
down before touching any parts.
Maintenance Safety
Important Safety Precautions
Injury from moving parts.
Potential Vehicle Hazards
Carbon Monoxide poison from
engine exhaust.
Burns from hot parts.
228
Failure to properly follow
maintenance instructions and
precautions can cause you to
be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the procedures
and precautions in this owner’s
manual.
Improperly maintaining this
vehicle or failing to correct a
problem before driving can
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the inspection,
maintenance recommendations,
and schedules in this owner’s
manual.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
CONTINUED
Calculated Engine
Oil Life (%)
100 % 91 %
90 % 81 %
80 % 71 %
70 % 61 %
60 % 51 %
50 % 41 %
40 % 31 %
30 % 21 %
20 % 16 %
15 % 11 %
10 % 6 %
5% 1%
0%
Displayed
Engine Oil Life (%)
100 %
90 %
80 %
70 %
60 %
50 %
40 %
30 %
20 %
15 %
10 %
5%
0%
Based on the engine operating
conditions and accumulated engine
revolutions, the onboard computer in
your vehicle calculates the remaining
engine oil life and displays it as a
percentage.
To see the current engine oil life,
turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position, and push and release
the Select/Reset knob repeatedly
until the engine oil life display
appears (see page ).
The remaining engine oil life is
displayed on the information display
according to this table:
Your vehicle displays engine oil life
and maintenance service items on
the information display to show you
when you should have your dealer
perform engine oil replacement and
indicated maintenance service.
70
Maintenance Minder
Engine Oil Life Display
Maintenance
229
ENGINE OIL LIFE
DISPLAY
SELECT/RESET
KNOB
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The maintenance item code or codes
indicate the main and sub items
required at the time of the oil change
(see page ).
When the remaining engine oil life is
5 to 1 percent, you will see a
‘‘SERVICE OIL LIFE’’ message
along with the same maintenance
item code(s), every time you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
If the remaining engine oil life is 15
to 6 percent, you will see the engine
oil life indicator every time you turn
the ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. The maintenance minder
indicator will also come on, and the
maintenance item code(s) for other
scheduled maintenance items
needing service will be displayed
next to the engine oil life indicator.
235
Maintenance Minder
230
MAINTENANCE
MINDER
INDICATOR
ENGINE OIL LIFE
INDICATOR
MAINTENANCE
ITEM CODE(S)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
The maximum total mileage shown
is ‘‘ 9999.’’
You can change the information
display from the engine oil life
display to the odometer, the trip
meter, or the outside temperature (if
equipped) every time you press and
release the Select/Reset knob.
When the engine oil life is 0 percent
or negative mileage, the
maintenance minder indicator
remainsonevenifyouchangethe
information display.If you still do not perform the
indicated maintenance, you will see a
negative mileage. It is displayed
when you drive over 10 miles (for
U.S. models) or 10 km (for Canadian
models) after seeing the 0 percent
message.Afterward,itshowsyour
driving distance if you continue to
drive. Immediately have the
indicated maintenance done by your
dealer.
When the remaining engine oil life is
0 percent, the engine oil life indicator
will blink. The display comes on
everytimeyouturntheignition
switch to the ON (II) position. When
you see this message, have the
indicated maintenance performed by
your dealer as soon as possible.
Immediately have the service
performed, and make sure to reset
the display.
Maintenance Minder
Maintenance
231
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your dealer will reset the display
after completing the required
maintenance service. You will see
‘‘OIL LIFE 100%’’ on the information
display the next time you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position.
When the vehicle needs
maintenance, maintenance codes
appear on the information display.
Press the Select/Reset knob until
the engine oil life indicator is
displayed.
For an explanation of the
maintenance codes, see page .
Press the Select/Reset knob for
more than 10 seconds. The engine
oil life and the maintenance item
code(s) will blink.
If maintenance service is done by
someone other than your dealer,
reset the maintenance minder as
follows:
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position.
1.
2.
3.
235
Maintenance Minder
Maintenance Main Items and Sub
Items
Resetting the Engine Oil Life
Display
232
MAINTENANCE ITEM CODE
ENGINE OIL LIFE
INDICATOR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you have the required service
done but do not reset the display, or
reset the display without doing the
service, the system will not show the
proper maintenance intervals. This
canleadtoseriousmechanical
problems because you will no longer
have an accurate record of when
maintenance is needed.
Your authorized Honda dealer
knows your vehicle best and can
provide competent, efficient service.
However, service at a dealer is not
mandatory to keep your warranties
in effect. Maintenance may be done
by any qualified service facility or
person who is skilled in this type of
automotive service. Make sure to
have the service facility or person
reset the display as previously
described. Keep all receipts as proof
of completion, and have the person
who does the work fill out the
maintenance record. Check your
warranty booklet for more
information.Press the Select/Reset knob for
another 5 seconds. The
maintenance item code(s) will
disappear, and the engine oil life
will reset to ‘‘100.’’
We recommend using Honda parts
and fluids whenever you have
maintenance done. These are
manufactured to the same high
quality standards as the original
components, so you can be confident
of their performance and durability.
4.
CONTINUED
Maintenance Minder
Important Maintenance
Precautions
Maintenance
233
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
＃
−
Youshouldcheckthefollowing
items at the specified intervals. If
you are unsure of how to perform
any check, turn to the appropriate
page listed.
Engine oil level Check every
time you fill the fuel tank. See
page .
Engine coolant level Check the
radiator reserve tank every time
you fill the fuel tank. See page .
Automatic transmission Check
the fluid level monthly. See page
.
Brakes Check the fluid level
monthly. See page .
Tires Check the tire pressure
monthly. Examine the tread for
wear and foreign objects. See page
.
According to state and federal
regulations, failure to perform
maintenance on the items marked
with will not void your emissions
warranties. However, all
maintenance services should be
performed in accordance with the
intervals indicated by the
information display.
Lights Check the operation of
the headlights, parking lights,
taillights, high-mount brake light,
turn signals, brake lights, and
license plate light monthly. See
page .
189
246
258
244
248
190
U.S. Vehicles:
Maintenance Minder
Owner’s Maintenance Checks
Maintenance, replacement, or
repair of emissions control
devices and systems may be done
by any automotive repair
establishment or individual using
parts that are ‘‘certified’’ to EPA
standards.
234
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＃
＃
−−
＃
Maintenance Minder
235
Maintenance Sub Items
Rotate tires
Replace air cleaner element
Replace dust and pollen filter
Inspect drive belt
Replace transmission and transfer fluid
Replace spark plugs
Replace timing belt and inspect water pump
Inspect valve clearance
Replace engine coolant
ReplaceVTM-4reardifferentialfluid
2
:
See information on maintenance and emissions warranty on page .
Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km).
If the message ‘‘SERVICE’’ does not appear more than 12 months after the
display is reset, change the engine oil every year.
Independent of the maintenance messages in the information display,
replace the brake fluid every 3 years.
Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if they are noisy.
NOTE:
1:
234
Maintenance Main Items
Replace engine oil
Replace engine oil and oil filter
Inspect front and rear brakes
Check parking brake adjustment
Inspect these items:
Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots
Suspension components
Driveshaft boots
Brake hoses and lines (including ABS)
All fluid levels and condition of fluids
Exhaust system
Fuel lines and connections
A
B
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
1
If you drive in dusty conditions, replace every 15,000 miles
(24,000 km).
If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations
of soot in the air from industry and from diesel-powered vehicles,
replace every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds or trailer
towing results in higher transmission and transfer fluid
temperatures. This requires transmission and transfer fluid changes
more frequently than recommended by the Maintenance Minder. If
you regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions, have the
transmission and transfer fluid changed every 30,000 miles
(48,000 km).
If you drive regularly in very high temperatures (over 110°F, 43°C),
in very low temperatures (under 20°F, 29°C), or towing a trailer,
replace every 60,000 miles (U.S.) /100,000 km (Canada).
Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds or trailer
towing results in higher level of mechanical (shear) stress to fluid
This requires differential fluid changes more frequently than
recommended by the Maintenance Minder. If you regularly drive
your vehicle under these conditions, have the differential fluid
changed at 7,500 miles (12,000 km), then every 15,000 miles
(24,000 km).
Symbol Symbol
Maintenance Minder
2:4WD
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Maintenance Record
236
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
You or the servicing dealer can record all completed maintenance here. When maintenance is performed, record the mileage, circle the coded item(s)
completed, and write in any other non-coded items (such as brake fluid replacement) below the codes. Keep the receipts for all work done on your
vehicle. Maintenance can also be recorded in your Honda service history booklet.
Mileage
km
km
km
km
km
km
km
Signature
Date
Mileage
km
km
km
km
km
km
km
Signature
Date
Maintenance
Performed
AB123456
AB123456
AB123456
AB123456
AB123456
AB123456
AB123456
Maintenance
Performed
AB123456
AB123456
AB123456
AB123456
AB123456
AB123456
AB123456
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Maintenance Record
Maintenance
237
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
mi
Mileage
km
km
km
km
km
km
km
Signature
Date
Mileage
km
km
km
km
km
km
km
Signature
Date
Maintenance
Performed
AB123456
AB123456
AB123456
AB123456
AB123456
AB123456
AB123456
Maintenance
Performed
AB123456
AB123456
AB123456
AB123456
AB123456
AB123456
AB123456
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Fluid Locations
238
RADIATOR CAP
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK
(Orange loop)
BRAKE FLUID
(Gray cap)
WASHER FLUID
(Blue cap)
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
FLUID DIPSTICK
(Yellow loop)
POWER STEERING
FLUID (Red cap)
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP
ENGINE COOLANT
RESERVOIR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Unscrew and remove the engine oil
fill cap on top of the valve cover.
Pour in the oil slowly and carefully so
you do not spill. Clean up any spills
immediately. Spilled oil could
damage components in the engine
compartment. Install the engine oil
fill cap, and tighten it securely. Wait
a few minutes, and recheck the oil
level. Do not fill above the upper
mark; you could damage the engine.
Oil is major contributor to your
engine’s performance and longevity.
Always use a premium-grade
detergent oil displaying the API
certification seal. This seal indicates
the oil is energy conserving, and that
it meets the American Petroleum
Institute’s latest requirements. It is
highly recommended that you use
Honda motor oil in your vehicle for
as long as you own it.
Honda motor oil is the preferred
5W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. It is
highly recommended that you use
Honda motor oil in your vehicle for
optimum engine protection. Make
sure the API certification seal says
‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’
The oil viscosity or weight is
provided on the container’s label.
5W-20 oil is formulated for year-
round protection of your vehicle to
improve cold weather starting and
fuel economy.
Recommended Engine Oil
Adding Engine Oil
Maintenance
239
API CERTIFICATION SEAL
Ambient Temperature
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Run the engine until it reaches
normal operating temperature,
then shut it off.
Open the hood, and remove the
engine oil fill cap. Remove the oil
drain bolt and washer from the
bottom of the engine. Drain the oil
into an appropriate container.
Always change the oil and filter
according to the maintenance
messages shown on the information
display. The oil and filter collect
contaminants that can damage your
engine if they are not removed
regularly.
You may use a synthetic motor oil if
it meets the same requirements
given for a conventional motor oil: it
displays the API certification seal,
and it is the proper weight. You must
follow the oil and filter change
intervals shown on the information
display.
Your vehicle does not require any oil
additives. Additives may adversely
affect the engine or transmission
performance and durability.
Changing the oil and filter requires
special tools and access from
underneath the vehicle. The vehicle
should be raised on a service station-
type hydraulic lift for this service.
Unless you have the knowledge and
proper equipment, you should have
this maintenance done by a skilled
mechanic.
1.
2.
Changing the Oil and FilterSynthetic Oil
Engine Oil Additives
Adding Engine Oil, Changing the Oil and Filter
240
DRAIN BOLTWASHER
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Install a new oil filter according to
the instructions that come with it.
Let the engine run for several
minutes, then check the drain bolt
and oil filter for leaks.
Refill the engine with the recom-
mended oil.
Engine oil change capacity
(including filter):
Reinstall the engine oil fill cap.
Start the engine. The oil pressure
indicator should go out within 5
seconds. If it does not, turn off the
engine, and check your work.
Turn off the engine and let it sit
for several minutes, then check
the oil level on the dipstick. If
necessary, add more oil.
Remove the oil filter, and let the
remaining oil drain. A special
wrench (available from your
dealer) is required.
Make sure the oil filter gasket is not
stuck to the engine block. If it is,
remove it before installing a new oil
filter.
Put a new washer on the drain bolt,
then reinstall the drain bolt.
Tighten the drain bolt to:
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Changing the Oil and Filter
Maintenance
241
OIL FILTER
29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m)
4.5 US qt (4.3
)
Improper disposal of engine oil can be
harmful to the environment. If you
change your own oil, please dispose of
the used oil properly. Put it in a sealed
container, and take it to a recycling
center. Do not discard it in a trash bin
or dump it on the ground.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If the coolant level in the reserve
tank is at or below the MIN line, add
coolant to bring it up to between the
MIN and MAX lines. Inspect the
cooling system for leaks.
Always use Honda Long-Life
Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2. This
coolant is pre-mixed with 50 %
antifreeze and 50 % water. Never add
straight antifreeze or plain water.
If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not
available, you may use another
major-brand non-silicate coolant as a
temporaryreplacement.Makesureit
is a high-quality coolant
recommended for aluminum engines.
Continued use of any non-Honda
coolant can result in corrosion,
causing the cooling system to
malfunction or fail. Have the cooling
system flushed and refilled with
Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as
possible.
If the reserve tank is completely
empty, you should also check the
coolant level in the radiator.
Adding Engine Coolant
Engine Coolant
242
RESERVE TANK
Removing the radiator cap
while the engine is hot can
cause the coolant to spray out,
seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and
radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
When the radiator and engine are
cool, relieve any pressure in the
cooling system by turning the
radiator cap counterclockwise,
without pressing down.
Remove the radiator cap by
pushing down and turning
counterclockwise.
The coolant level should be up to
the base of the filler neck. Add
coolant if it is low.
Check the fluid level in the
windshield washer reservoir at least
monthly during normal use.
Pourthecoolantslowlyand
carefully so you do not spill any.
Clean up any spill immediately; it
could damage components in the
engine compartment.
Put the radiator cap back on and
tighten it.
Pour coolant into the reserve tank.
Fill it to halfway between the MAX
and MIN marks. Put the cap back
on the reserve tank.
Do not add any rust inhibitors or
other additives to your vehicle’s
cooling system. They may not be
compatible with the coolant or
engine components.
Fill the reservoir with a good-quality
windshield washer fluid. This
increases the cleaning capability and
prevents freezing in cold weather.
When you refill the reservoir, clean
the edges of the windshield wiper
blades with windshield washer fluid
on a clean cloth. This will help to
condition them.
The low washer
level indicator comes on when the
level is low (see page ).
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.
67
On Canadian models:
Windshield Washers
Engine Coolant, Windshield Washers
Maintenance
243
RADIATOR CAP
Do not use engine antifreeze or a
vinegar/water solution in the
windshield washer reservoir. Antifreeze
can damage your vehicle’s paint, while
a vinegar/water solution can damage
the windshield washer pump. Use only
commercially-available windshield
washer fluid.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Check the fluid level with the engine
at normal operating temperature.
Remove the dipstick and check
the fluid level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks.
Insert the dipstick all the way into
the transmission securely as
shown in the illustration.
Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)
from the transmission, and wipe it
with a clean cloth.
Park the vehicle on level ground.
Start the engine let it run until the
radiator fan comes on, then shut
off the engine. For accurate
results, wait about 60 seconds
before going step 2, but don’t wait
longer than 90 seconds.
If the level is below the lower
mark, remove the fill plug, then
add the fluid into the fill hole to
bring it to the level between the
upper and lower marks on the
dipstick.
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully
so you do not spill any. Clean up
any spill immediately; it could
damage components in the engine
compartment.
If you are not sure how to add
fluid or you do not have the proper
equipment to reach the
transmission fluid fill hole, you
should have this maintenance
done by a skilled technician.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Automatic Transmission
244
DIPSTICK
DIPSTICK
UPPER MARK
LOWER MARK
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Put
a
ne
w
w
a
s
he
r
o
n
t
he filler bolt,
then reinstall the filler bolt and
tighten it securely. Tightening
torque:
The differential should be drained
and refilled with new fluid according
to the time and distance recommen-
dations in the maintenance schedule.
GL5 with a viscosity of SAE 90 or
80W-90, and have your dealer
replace the transfer assembly fluid.
Check the fluid level with the
differential at normal operating
temperature and the vehicle sitting
on level ground. Remove the
differential fluid filler bolt and
washer, and carefully feel inside the
bolt hole with your finger. The fluid
level should be up to the edge of the
bolt hole. If it is not, slowly add
VTM-4 Differential Fluid until it
starts to run out of the hole.
Always use Honda ATF-Z1
(automatic transmission fluid). If
it’s not available, you may use a
DEXRON
III automatic
transmission fluid as a temporary
replacement. However, continued
use can affect the shift quality.
Have the transmission flushed and
refilled with Honda ATF-Z1 by
your dealer as soon as it is
convenient.
Insert the dipstick all the way back
into the transmission securely as
shown in the illustration.
The transmission should be drained
and refilled with new fluid according
to the time and distance recommen-
dations in the maintenance schedule.
The transfer assembly should be
drained and refilled with new fluid
when this service is indicated by a
maintenance message on the
information display.
Always use Hypoid gear oil GL4 or
6.
4WD models only
Transfer Assembly Fluid
Differential Oil
Automatic Transmission Fluid, Differential Oil, Transfer Assembly Fluid
Maintenance
245
FILLER BOLT
CORRECT LEVEL
33 lbf·ft (45 N·m , 4.6 kgf·m)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Timing Belt, Brake Fluid
246
Always use Honda Heavy Duty
Brake Fluid DOT 3. If it is not
available, you should use only DOT 3
or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealed
container, as a temporary
replacement.
Using any non-Honda brake fluid can
cause corrosion and decrease the life
of the system. Have the brake
system flushed and refilled with
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
DOT 3 as soon as possible.
Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not
compatible with your vehicle’s
braking system and can cause
extensive damage.
Check the brake fluid level in the
reservoir monthly.
Replace the brake fluid according to
the time recommendation in the
maintenance minder schedule.
−−
In very high temperatures
(over 110°F, 43°C).
In very low temperatures
(under 20°F, 29°C).
Frequently tow a trailer.
The timing belt should be replaced
according to the maintenance
message shown on the information
display. Replace the belt at 60,000
miles (100,000 km) if you regularly
drive your vehicle in one or more of
these conditions:
Timing Belt
Brake Fluid
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Check the level on the side of the
reservoir when the engine is cold.
The fluid should be between the
UPPER LEVEL and LOWER LEVEL.
If not add power steering fluid to the
UPPER LEVEL mark.
A
low power steering f
luid level can
indicate a leak in the system. Check
the fluid level frequently, and have
the system inspected as soon as
possible.
Brake Fluid, Power Steering Fluid
Maintenance
247
UPPER LEVEL
LOWER LEVEL
Turning the steering wheel to full left
or right lock and holding it there can
damage the power steering pump.
Always use Honda Power Steering
F
luid. You may use anot
her power
steering fluid as an emergency
replacement, but have the power
steering system flushed and refilled
with Honda PSF as soon as possible.
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so
you do not spill any. Clean up any
spill immediately; it could damage
components in the engine
compartment.
The fluid level should be between
theMINandMAXmarksontheside
of the reservoir. If the level is at or
below the MIN mark, your brake
system needs attention. Have the
brake system inspected for leaks or
worn brake pads.
MIN
MAX
Power Steering Fluid
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Open the hood.
Remove the electrical connector
from the bulb by squeezing the
connector to unlock the tab, then
slide the connector off the bulb.
Remove the bulb by turning it
approximately one-quarter turn
counterclockwise.
Insert the new bulb into the hole,
and turn it one-quarter turn
clockwise to lock it in place.
Push the electrical connector onto
the new bulb.
Turn on the headlights to test the
new bulb.
Theheadlightswereproperlyaimed
when your vehicle was new. If you
regularly carry heavy items in the
trunk, readjustment may be required.
Adjustment should be done by your
dealer or other qualified mechanic.
Your vehicle has halogen headlight
bulbs. When replacing a bulb, handle
it by its base, and protect the glass
from contact with your skin or hard
objects. If you touch the glass, clean
it with denatured alcohol and a clean
cloth.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Headlight Aiming
Replacing a Headlight Bulb
Lights
248
TAB
BULB CONNECTOR
Halogen headlight bulbs get very hot
when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch
on the glass can cause the bulb to
overheat and shatter.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
To remove the front turn signal
bulb, push it in slightly and turn it
counterclockwise.
Install the new bulb into the
socket and reinstall it.
Insert the socket back into the
headlight assembly. Turn it
clockwise to lock it in place.
Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
Remove the socket from the
headlight assembly by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
To remove a bulb, pull it straight
out of its socket.
Install the new bulb into the
socket.
Remove the socket from the
headlight assembly by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
Insert the socket back into the
headlight assembly. Turn it
clockwise to lock it in place.
Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
1.
4.
5.
3.
2.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Lights
Replacing a Front Turn Signal
Bulb
Replacing a Parking Light/Front
Side Marker Light Bulbs
Maintenance
249
SOCKET
SOCKET
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you are changing the bulb on
the driver’s side, start the engine,
turn the steering wheel all the way
to the left, and turn off the engine.
If you are changing the bulb on
the passenger’s side, turn the
steering wheel to the right.
Use a flat-tipped screwdriver to
remove the three holding clips
from the inner fender.
Pull the inner fender cover away
from the fender.
Remove the socket from the turn
signal assembly by turning it one-
quarter turn counterclockwise.
Pull the burned out bulb straight
out of its socket.
Push the new bulb straight into
the socket until it bottoms.
Insert the socket back into the
turn signal assembly. Turn it
clockwise to lock it in place.
Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
Put the inner fender cover in place.
Install the three holding clips.
Lock each clip in place by pushing
on the center.
1.
4.
5.
3.
2.
6.
7.
8.
Lights
Replacing a Side Turn Signal Bulb
250
SOCKET
BULB
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If equipped
Use a wrench to remove the
mounting bolt from the underbody.
Pull the under cover away from
the bumper.
Remove the electrical connector
from the bulb by pushing on the
tab and pulling the connector
down.
Remove the bulb by turning it one-
quarter turn counterclockwise.
Insert the new bulb into the
assembly and turn it one-quarter
turn clockwise to lock it in place.
Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
Reinstall the mounting bolt on the
under cover.
1.
4.
5.
3.
2.
6.
7.
Lights
Replacing a Front Fog Light Bulb
Maintenance
251
BOLT
BULB
CONNECTOR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Open the tailgate.
Remove the two screws, then pull
the rear light assembly straight
back to remove it from the body.
Open the tailgate. Place a cloth on
the edge of the cover. Remove the
covers by carefully prying on the
edge with a small flat-tipped
screwdriver.
Remove the socket by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
Remove the socket of the burned
out bulb by turning it one-quarter
turn counterclockwise, and pull it
straight out of its socket.
Install a new bulb into the socket,
and reinstall the socket into the
light assembly.
1.1.
2.
3.
2.
4.
Lights
Replacing Rear Bulbs Replacing a Back-up Light Bulb
252
SCREW
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Use a Phillips-head screwdriver to
remove the screw under the lens.
Place a cloth on the middle edge
of a part of the lens on the
passenger’s side. Remove a part of
the lens by carefully prying on its
edge with a small flip tipped
screwdriver.
Reinstall the back-up light cover.
Pull the burned out bulb straight
out of its socket.
Push the new bulb straight into
the socket until it bottoms.
Insert the socket back into the
light assembly. Turn it clockwise
to lock it in place.
Pull the light assembly out of the
tailgate.
Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket. Push a new bulb into the
socket until it bottoms. Reinstall
the assembly.
Remove the socket from the light
assembly by turning it one-quarter
turn counterclockwise.
Turn on the lights to make sure
the new bulb is working.
1.
4.
5.
3.
2.
4.
5.
6.
3.
Lights
Replacing the High-mount Brake
Light
Maintenance
253
SCREWS
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If your seat belts get dirty, use a soft
brush with a mixture of mild soap
and warm water to clean them. Do
not use bleach, dye, or cleaning
solvents. Let the belts air-dry before
you use the vehicle.
Dirt build-up in the loops of the seat
belt anchors can cause the belts to
retract slowly. Wipe the insides of
the loops with a clean cloth
dampened in mild soap and warm
water or isopropyl alcohol.
The driver’s floor mat that came
with your vehicle hooks over the
floor mat anchors. This keeps the
floor mat from sliding forward and
possibly interfering with the pedals.
If you remove a floor mat, make sure
tore-anchoritwhenyouputitback
in your vehicle.
If you use non-Honda floor mats,
make sure they fit properly and that
theycanbeusedwiththefloormat
anchors. Do not put additional floor
mats on top of the anchored mats.
Floor Mats Cleaning Seat Belts
Floor Mats, Cleaning Seat Belts
254
LOOP
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Disconnect the blade assembly
fromthewiperarmbypushingin
the lock tab. Hold the lock tab in
while you push the blade assembly
toward the base of the arm.
Check the condition of the wiper
blades at least every 6 months.
Replace them if you find signs of
cracking in the rubber, areas that are
getting hard, or if they leave streaks
and unwiped areas when used.
Raise each wiper arm off the
windshield, lifting the driver’s side
first, then the passenger’s side.
1. 2. Front only:
CONTINUED
Wiper Blades
Maintenance
255
WIPER ARMS
LOCK TAB
Do not open the hood when the wiper
arms are raised, or you will damage the
hood and wiper arms.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Slide the new wiper blade into the
holder until the tabs lock.
Slide the wiper blade assembly
onto the wiper arm. Make sure it
locks in place.
Examine the new wiper blades. If
they have no plastic or metal
reinforcement along the back
edge, remove the metal
reinforcement strips from the old
wiper blade, and install them in
the slots along the edge of the new
blade.
Remove the blade from its holder
by grasping the tabbed end of the
blade. Pull firmly until the tabs
come out of the holder.
Lower the wiper arm.
3. 4.
5.
6.
7.
Front only:
Wiper Blades
256
REINFORCEMENT
BLADE BLADE
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Keeping the tires properly inflated
provides the best combination of
handling, tread life, and riding
comfort.
Underinflated tires wear unevenly,
adversely affect handling and fuel
economy, and are more likely to
fail from being overheated.
Overinflated tires can make your
vehicleridemoreharshly,are
more prone to damage from road
hazards, and wear unevenly.
The tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) will warn you when tire
pressure is low. See page for
information on the TPMS.
To safely operate your vehicle, your
tires must be the proper type and
size, in good condition with adequate
tread, and correctly inflated.
The following pages give more
detailed information on how to take
care of your tires and what to do
when they need to be replaced.
Clean the wheels as you would the
rest of the exterior. Wash them with
thesamesolution,andrinsethem
thoroughly.
Aluminum alloy wheels have a
protective clear-coat that keeps the
aluminum from corroding and
tarnishing. Cleaning the wheels with
harsh chemicals (including some
commercial wheel cleaners) or a stiff
brush can damage the clear-coat. To
clean the wheels, use a mild
detergent and a soft brush or sponge.
205
CONTINUED
Inflation GuidelinesTiresWheels
Wheels, Tires
Maintenance
257
Using tires that are excessively
worn or improperly inflated can
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding tire
inflation and maintenance.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The following chart shows the
recommended cold tire pressures for
most normal driving conditions.
Thecompactsparetirepressureis:
For convenience, the recommended
tire sizes and cold tire pressures are
on a label on the driver’s doorjamb.
For additional information about
your tires, see page .
If you check air pressures when the
tires are hot [driven for several miles
(kilometers)], you will see readings 4
to6psi(30to40kPa,0.3to0.4
kgf/cm ) higher than the cold
readings. This is normal. Do not let
air out to match the recommended
cold air pressure. The tire will be
underinflated.
Youshouldgetyourowntire
pressure gauge and use it whenever
you check your tire pressures. This
will make it easier for you to tell if a
pressure loss is due to a tire problem
and not due to a variation between
gauges.
While tubeless tires have some
ability to self-seal if they are
punctured, you should look closely
for punctures if a tire starts losing
pressure.
We recommend that you visually
check your tires every day. If you
think a tire might be low, check it
immediately with a tire gauge.
Use a gauge to measure the air
pressure in each tire at least once a
month. Even tires that are in good
condition may lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to
20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm ) per
month. Remember to check the
sparetireatthesametime.
Check the air pressures when the
tires are cold. This means the
vehicle has been parked for at least 3
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6
km). Add or release air, if needed, to
match the recommended cold tire
pressures.
289
Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure
for Normal Driving
Tires
Recommended Tire Pressures
258
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
32 psi (220 kPa ,
2.2 kgf/cm
)
P235/70R16 104S
Main Menu
Table of Contents
In addition to proper inflation,
correct wheel alignment helps to
decrease tire wear. If you find a tire
is worn unevenly, have your dealer
check the wheel alignment.
Have your dealer check the tires if
you feel a consistent vibration while
driving. A tire should always be
rebalanced if it is removed from the
wheel. When you have new tires
installed, make sure they are
balanced. This increases riding
comfort and tire life. For best results,
have the installer perform a dynamic
balance.
Your tires have wear indicators
molded into the tread. When the
tread wears down, you will see a
band 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wide band
across the tread. This shows there is
less than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread
left on the tire.
A tire this worn gives very little
traction on wet roads. You should
replace the tire if you can see three
or more tread wear indicators.
Every time you check inflation, you
should also examine the tires for
damage, foreign objects, and wear.
Youshouldlookfor:
Bumps or bulges in the tread or
side of the tire. Replace the tire if
youfindeitheroftheseconditions.
Cuts, splits, or cracks in the side
of the tire. Replace the tire if you
can see fabric or cord.
Excessive tread wear.
Tires
Tire MaintenanceTire Inspection
Maintenance
259
INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS
TREAD WEAR INDICATORS
Improper wheel weights can damage
your vehicle’s aluminum wheels. Use
only Honda wheel weights for
balancing.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Wheels:
Tires:
See page for information about
DOT Tire Quality Grading, and page
for tire size and labeling
information.
Replace your tires with radial tires of
the same size, load range, speed
rating, and maximum cold tire
pressure rating (as shown on the
tire’s side wall).
Mixing radial and bias-ply tires on
your vehicle can reduce braking
ability, traction, and steering
accuracy. Using tires of a different
size or construction can cause the
anti-lock brake and the vehicle
stability assist systems to work
inconsistently.
It is best to replace all four tires at
thesametime.Ifthatisnotpossible
or necessary, replace the two front
tires or two rear tires as a pair.
Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling.
If you ever replace a wheel, make
sure that the wheel’s specifications
match those of the original wheels.
Replacement wheels are available at
your dealer.
To help increase tire life and
distribute wear more evenly, rotate
the tires according to the
maintenance messages displayed on
the information display.
Move the tires to the positions
shown in the illustration each time
they are rotated. If you purchase
directional tires, rotate only front-to-
back.
290
291
Tires
Wheel and Tire Specifications
Replacing Tires and WheelsTire Rotation
260
(For Non-directional
Tires and Wheels)
(For Directional
Tires and Wheels)
Front
Front
16x61/2JJ
P235/70R16 104S
Installing improper tires on your
vehicle can affect handling and
stability. This can cause a crash
in which you can be seriously
hurt or killed.
Always use the size and type of
tires recommended in this
owner’s manual.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＋
When installing cables, follow the
manufacturer’s instructions, and
mount them as tight as you can.
Make sure they are not contacting
the brake lines or suspension. Drive
slowly with them installed. If you
hear them coming into contact with
the body or chassis, stop and
investigate. Remove them as soon as
youbegindrivingonclearedroads.
Because your vehicle has limited tire
clearance, mount only SAE Class ‘‘S’’
cable-type traction devices, with
rubber chain tensioners, on the front
tires. Use traction devices only when
required by driving conditions or
local laws. Make sure they are the
correct size for your tires. Metal link-
type ‘‘chains’’ should not be used.
Tires marked ‘‘M S’’ or ‘‘All
Season’’ on the sidewall have an all-
weather tread design suitable for
most winter driving conditions.
For the best performance in snowy
or icy conditions, you should install
snow tires or tire chains. They may
be required by local laws under
certain conditions.
If you mount snow tires on your
vehicle, make sure they are radial
tires of the same size and load range
as original tires. Mount snow tires on
all four wheels. The traction
provided by snow tires on dry roads
maybelowerthanyouroriginaltires.
Check with the tire dealer for
maximum speed recommendations.
Tires
Tire ChainsWinter Driving
Snow Tires
Maintenance
261
Traction devices that are the wrong
size or improperly installed can
damage your vehicle’s brake lines,
suspension, body, and wheels. Stop
driving if they are hitting any part of
the vehicle.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
Check the condition of the battery
monthlybylookingatthetest
indicator window. The label on the
battery explains the test indicator’s
colors.
If additional battery maintenance is
needed, see your dealer or a
qualified technician.
Battery posts,
terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds.
Check the terminals for corrosion (a
white or yellowish powder). To
remove it, cover the terminals with a
solution of baking soda and water. It
will bubble up and turn brown. When
this stops, wash it off with plain
water. Dry off the battery with a
cloth or paper towel. Coat the
terminals with grease to help prevent
further corrosion.
If you need to connect the battery to
a charger, disconnect both cables to
prevent damaging your vehicle’s
electrical system. Always disconnect
the negative ( ) cable first, and
reconnect it last.
WARNING:
Wash your hands after handling.
Checking the Battery
262
TEST INDICATOR WINDOW
The battery gives off explosive
hydrogen gas during normal
operation.
A spark or flame can cause the
battery to explode with enough
force to kill or seriously hurt you.
Wear protective clothing and a
face shield, or have a skilled
technician do the battery
maintenance.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Fill the fuel tank.
Change the engine oil and filter.
Block the rear wheels.
Wash and dry the exterior
completely.
Cleantheinterior.Makesurethe
carpeting, floor mats, etc., are
completely dry.
If you need to park your vehicle for
an extended period (more than 1
month), there are several things you
should do to prepare it for storage.
Proper preparation helps prevent
deterioration and makes it easier to
get your vehicle back on the road. If
possible, store your vehicle indoors. Leave one window open slightly (if
the vehicle is being stored
indoors).
Cover the vehicle with a
‘‘breathable’’ cover, one made
from a porous material such as
cotton. Non-porous materials, such
as plastic sheeting, trap moisture,
which can damage the paint.
Support the front wiper blade
arms with a folded towel or rag so
they do not touch the windshield.
Disconnect the battery.
Leave the parking brake off. Put
the transmission in Park.
To minimize sticking, apply a
silicone spray lubricant to all door
and tailgate seals. Also, apply a
vehiclebodywaxtothepainted
surfaces that mate with the door
and tailgate seals.
If possible, periodically run the
engine until it reaches full
operating temperature (the
cooling fans cycle on and off
twice). Preferably, do this once a
month.
If the vehicle is to be stored for a
longer period, it should be
supported on jackstands so the
tires are off the ground.
Vehicle Storage
Maintenance
263
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Main Menu
This section covers the more
common problems that motorists
experience with their vehicles. It
gives you information about how to
safely evaluate the problem and what
to do to correct it. If the problem has
stranded you on the side of the road,
you may be able to get going again.
If not, you will also find instructions
on getting your vehicle towed.
......................Compact Spare Tire . 266
....................Changing a Flat Tire . 267
.............If the Engine Won’t Start . 271
................................Jump Starting . 272
..............If the Engine Overheats . 274
.........Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 276
..........Charging System Indicator . 276
.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 277
...............Brake System Indicator . 278
......................Emergency Towing . 279
..............................................Fuses . 279
..............................Fuse Locations . 283
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Taking Care of the Unexpected
265
Main Menu
Use the compact spare tire as a
temporary replacement only. Get
your regular tire repaired or replaced,
and put it back on your vehicle as
soon as you can.
Check the inflation pressure of the
compact spare tire every time you
check the other tires. It should be
inflated to:
Replace the tire when you can see
the tread wear indicator bars. The
replacement should be the same size
and design tire, mounted on the
same wheel. The spare tire is not
designed to be mounted on a regular
wheel, and the spare wheel is not
designed for mounting a regular tire.
Follow these precautions:
Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
This tire gives a harsher ride and
less traction on some road
surfaces. Use greater caution
while driving.
Do not mount snow chains on the
compact spare tire.
Do not use your compact spare
tire on another vehicle unless it is
thesamemakeandmodel.
Do not use the compact spare tire
if you are towing a trailer.
Compact Spare Tire
266
INDICATOR LOCATION MARK
TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
If you have a flat tire while driving,
stop in a safe place to change it.
Drive slowly along the shoulder until
you get to an exit or an area to stop
that is far away from the traffic lanes.
Park the vehicle on firm, level, and
non-slippery ground. Put the
transmission in Park. Apply the
parking brake.
If you are towing a trailer, unhitch
it.
Turn on the hazard warning lights,
and turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position. Have all
passengers get out of the vehicle
while you change the tire.
Turn the jack’s end bracket
counterclockwise to loosen it, then
remove the jack and tools.
Thetoolsandjackarebehinda
cover in the cargo area on the
driver’s side. Remove the cover by
pushing the top of the cover.
2.
1. 3.
4.
Changing a Flat Tire
Taking Care of the Unexpected
267
SPARE TIRE
TOOLS
COVER
JACK
The vehicle can easily roll off
the jack, seriously injuring
anyone underneath.
Follow the directions for
changing a tire exactly, and
never get under the vehicle
when it is supported only by the
jack.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Put the wheel nut wrench on the
hoist shaft. Turn the wrench
counterclockwise to lower the
spare tire to the ground. Keep
turning the wheel nut wrench to
create slack in the cable.
Remove the bracket from the
spare tire.
The spare tire is stored
underneath the rear cargo area.
Remove the plastic cover on the
cargo area lining to access the
shaft for the spare tire hoist.
Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turn
with the wheel nut wrench.
Placethejackunderthejacking
point nearest the tire you need to
change. Turn the end bracket
clockwise until the top of the jack
contacts the jacking point. Make
sure the jacking point tab is
restinginthejacknotch.
8.
7.
6.
5.
9.
Changing a Flat Tire
268
BRACKET
JACKING POINT
WHEEL NUT WRENCH
The wheel nut wrench supplied with
your vehicle is specially adapted to fit
the hoist shaft. Do not use any other
tool.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Use the extension and the wheel
nut wrench as shown to raise the
vehicle until the flat tire is off the
ground.
Before mounting the spare tire,
wipeanydirtoffthemounting
surface of the wheel and hub with
a clean cloth. Wipe the hub
carefully;itmaybehotfrom
driving.
Put on the spare tire. Put the
wheel nuts back on finger-tight,
then tighten them in a crisscross
pattern with the wheel nut wrench
until the wheel is firmly against
the hub. Do not try to tighten the
wheel nuts fully.
Tighten the wheel nuts securely in
the same crisscross pattern. Have
the wheel nut torque checked at
the nearest automotive service
facility.
Tighten the wheel nuts to:
Remove the center cap from the
flat tire, and place the flat tire up
under the hoist.
Remove the wheel nuts and the
flat tire. Temporarily place the flat
tire on the ground with the outside
surface of the wheel facing up.
Lower the vehicle to the ground,
and remove the jack.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
CONTINUED
Changing a Flat Tire
Taking Care of the Unexpected
269
EXTENSION
BRAKE HUB
WHEEL NUT WRENCH
80 lbf·ft (108 N·m , 11 kgf·m)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Insert the hoist bracket into the
center hole of the flat tire.
Slowly turn the wheel nut wrench
clockwisetotakeuptheslackof
the hoist cable. Make sure the
bracketisseatedinthecenter
hole of the flat tire.
Turn the wheel nut wrench
clockwise until the flat tire rests
against the underbody of the
vehicle and you hear the hoist
click.
Store the jack in its holder. Turn
the jack’s end bracket to lock it in
place. Replace the cover. Store the
tools.
17.
18.
19.
20.
Changing a Flat Tire
270
Loose items can fly around the
interiorinacrashandcould
seriously injure the occupants.
Store the wheel, jack, and tools
securely before driving.
Always raise the spare tire hoist, even
if you are not stowing a tire. If the
hoist is left down, it will be damaged
during driving and need to be replaced.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Diagnosing why the engine won’t
start falls into two areas, depending
on what you hear when you turn the
ignition switch to the START (III)
position:
You hear nothing, or almost
nothing. The engine’s starter
motor does not operate at all, or
operates very slowly.
You can hear the starter motor
operating normally, or the starter
motor sounds like it is spinning
faster than normal, but the engine
does not start up and run.
When you turn the ignition switch to
the START (III) position, you do not
hear the normal noise of the engine
trying to start. You may hear a
clicking sound, a series of clicks, or
nothing at all.
Check the transmission interlock.
The transmission must be in Park
or neutral or the starter will not
operate.
Are you using the proper starting
procedure? Refer to
on page .
In this case, the starter motor’s
speed sounds normal, or even faster
than normal, when you turn the
ignition switch to the START (III)
position, but the engine does not run.
Check these things:
Turn the ignition switch to the
START (III) position. If the
headlights do not dim, check the
condition of the fuses. If the fuses
areOK,thereisprobably
something wrong with the
electrical circuit for the ignition
switch or starter motor. You will
need a qualified technician to
determine the problem. See
on page .
Turn the ignition switch to the ON
(II) position. Turn on the
headlights, and check their
brightness. If the headlights are
very dim or do not come on at all,
the battery is discharged. See
on page .
If the headlights dim noticeably or
go out when you try to start the
engine, either the battery is
discharged or the connections are
corroded. Check the condition of
the battery and terminal
connections (see page ). You
canthentryjumpstartingthe
vehicle from a booster battery
(see page ).
272
279
199
262
272
CONTINUED
Nothing Happens or the Starter
Motor Operates Very Slowly
Starting the
Engine
The Starter Operates Normally
Emergency Towing
Jump Starting
IftheEngineWon’tStart
Taking Care of the Unexpected
271
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＋
＋
There may be an electrical
problem, such as no power to the
fuel pump. Check all the fuses
(see page ).
Although this seems like a simple
procedure, you should take several
precautions.
Open the hood, and check the
physical condition of the battery.
In very cold weather, check the
condition of the electrolyte. If it
seems slushy or frozen, do not try
jump starting until it thaws.
Connect one jumper cable to the
positive ( ) terminal on your
battery. Connect the other end to
the positive ( ) terminal on the
booster battery.
Do you have fuel? Check the fuel
gauge; the low fuel indicator may
not be working.
You cannot start your vehicle by
pushing or pulling it.
Are you using a properly coded
key? An improperly coded key will
cause the immobilizer system
indicator in the instrument panel
to blink rapidly (see page ).
Ifyoufindnothingwrong,youwill
need a qualified mechanic to find the
problem. See
on page .
Turn off all electrical accessories:
heater, A/C, climate control, audio
system, lights, etc. Put the
transmission in Park, and set the
parking brake.
To jump start your vehicle:1.
2.
3.
64
279
279
If the Engine Won’t Start, Jump Starting
Jump Starting
Emergency Towing
272
A battery can explode if you do
not follow the correct procedure,
seriously injuring anyone
nearby.
Keep all sparks, open flames,
and smoking materials away
from the battery.
If a battery sits in extreme cold, the
electrolyte inside can freeze.
Attempting to jump start with a frozen
battery can cause it to rupture.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
Connect the second jumper cable
to the negative ( ) terminal on
the booster battery. Connect the
other end to the grounding strap
as shown. Do not connect this
jumper cable to any other part of
the engine.
If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, have an assistant start
that vehicle and run it at a fast idle.
Start the vehicle. If the starter
motor still operates slowly, check
that the jumper cables have good
metal-to-metal contact.
Keep the ends of the jumper cables
away from each other and any metal
on the vehicle until everything is
disconnected. Otherwise, you may
cause an electrical short.
Once your vehicle is running,
disconnect the negative cable from
your vehicle, then from the
booster battery. Disconnect the
positive cable from your vehicle,
then from the booster battery.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Jump Starting
Taking Care of the Unexpected
273
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you do not see steam or spray,
leave the engine running, and
watch the temperature gauge. If
the high heat is due to overloading,
the engine should start to cool
down almost immediately. If it
does, wait until the temperature
gauge comes down to the midpoint,
then continue driving.
If the temperature gauge stays at
the red mark, turn off the engine.
Look for any obvious coolant leaks,
such as a split radiator hose.
Everything is still extremely hot,
so use caution. If you find a leak, it
must be repaired before you
continue driving (see
on page ).
If you see steam and/or spray
coming from under the hood, turn
off the engine. Wait until you see
no more signs of steam or spray,
then open the hood.
The pointer of your vehicle’s
temperature gauge should stay in
the midrange under most conditions.
If it climbs to the red mark, you
should determine the reason (hot
day, driving up a steep hill, etc.).
If your vehicle overheats, you should
take immediate action. The only
indication may be the temperature
gauge climbing to or above the red
mark. Or you may see steam or
spray coming from under the hood.
If you don’t find an obvious leak,
check the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank (see page
). Add coolant if the level is
below the MIN mark.
Safely pull to the side of the road.
Put the transmission in neutral or
Park, and set the parking brake.
Turn off all the accessories, and
turn on the hazard warning lights.
5.
6.
4.1.
2.
3.
279
190
IftheEngineOverheats
Emergency
Towing
274
Steam and spray from an
overheated engine can
seriously scald you.
Do not open the hood if steam
is coming out.
Driving with the temperature gauge
pointer at the red mark can cause
serious damage to the engine.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If there was no coolant in the
reserve tank, you may need to add
coolant to the radiator. Let the
engine cool down until the pointer
reaches the middle of the tempera-
ture gauge, or lower, before check-
ing the radiator.
Using gloves or a large heavy
cloth, turn the radiator cap
counterclockwise, without pushing
down, to the first stop. After the
pressure releases, push down on
the cap, and turn it until it comes
off.
Start the engine, and set the
interior temperature to maximum.
Add coolant to the radiator up to
the base of the filler neck. If you
do not have the proper coolant
mixture available, you can add
plain water. Remember to have
the cooling system drained and
refilled with the proper mixture as
soon as you can.
Put the radiator cap back on
tightly. Run the engine, and check
the temperature gauge. If it goes
back to the red mark, the engine
needs repair (see
on page ).
If the temperature stays normal,
check the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. If it has
gone down, add coolant to the
MAX mark. Put the cap back on
tightly.
7.
8.
9.
279
11.
10.
IftheEngineOverheats
Emergency
Towing
Taking Care of the Unexpected
275
Removing the radiator cap
while the engine is hot can
cause the coolant to spray out,
seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and
radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If necessary, add oil to bring the
level back to the full mark on the
dipstick (see page ).
Safely pull off the road, and shut
off the engine. Turn on the hazard
warning lights.
Go to a service station or garage
where you can get technical
assistance.
Immediately turn off all electrical
accessories. Try not to use other
electrically operated controls such as
the power windows. Keep the engine
running; starting the engine will
discharge the battery rapidly.
If the charging system
indicator comes on brightly
when the engine is running, the
battery is not being charged.
This indicator should never
come on when the engine is
running. If it starts flashing or stays
on, the oil pressure has dropped very
low or lost pressure. Serious engine
damage is possible, and you should
take immediate action.
Let the vehicle sit for a minute.
Open the hood, and check the oil
level (see page ). An engine
very low on oil can lose pressure
during cornering and other driving
maneuvers.
Start the engine and watch the oil
pressure indicator. If it does not go
out within 10 seconds, turn off the
engine. There is a mechanical
problem that needs to be repaired
before you can continue driving
(see on page
).
1.
2.
3.
4.
189
279
239
Low Oil Pressure Indicator Charging System Indicator
Emergency Towing
Low Oil Pressure Indicator, Charging System Indicator
276
Running the engine with low oil
pressure can cause serious mechanical
damage almost immediately. Turn off
the engine as soon as you can safely get
the vehicle stopped.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If your vehicle’s battery has been
disconnected or gone dead, these
codes are erased. It takes at least
three days of driving under various
conditions to set the codes again.
To check if they are set, turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position without starting the engine.
The malfunction indicator lamp will
come on for 20 seconds. If it then
goes off, the readiness codes are set.
If it blinks 5 times, the readiness
codes are not set. If possible, do not
take your vehicle for a state
emissions test until the readiness
codes are set. Refer to
for more
information (see page ).
If this indicator comes on
while driving, it means one
of the engine’s emission control
systems may have a problem. Even
though you may feel no difference in
your vehicle’s performance,
continued operation may cause
serious damage.
If you have recently refueled your
vehicle, the indicator coming on
could be due to a loose or missing
fuel fill cap. You will also see a
‘‘CHECK FUEL CAP’’ message on
the information display. Tighten the
cap until it clicks at least once (see
page ). Tightening the cap will
not turn the indicator off
immediately; it takes at least three
days of normal driving.
If the indicator remains on or the
fuel cap was not loose or missing,
have the vehicle checked by the
dealer as soon as possible.
If the malfunction indicator lamp
comes on along with the ‘‘D’’
indicator, there is a problem in the
automatic transmission control
system.
Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readiness
codes’’ that are part of the on-board
diagnostics for the emissions
systems. In some states, part of the
emissions testing is to make sure
these codes are set. If they are not
set, the test cannot be completed.
298
187 State
Emissions Testing
Readiness Codes
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Taking Care of the Unexpected
277
If you keep driving with the
malfunction indicator lamp on, you can
damage your vehicle’s emissions
controls and the engine. Those repairs
may not be covered by your vehicle’s
warranties.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you must drive the vehicle a short
distance in this condition, drive
slowly and carefully.
However, if the brake pedal does not
feel normal, you should take
immediate action. A problem in one
part of the system’s dual circuit
design will still give you braking at
two wheels. You will feel the brake
pedal go down much farther before
the vehicle begins to slow down, and
you will have to press harder on the
pedal.If the brake system indicator comes
on while driving, the brake fluid level
is probably low. Press lightly on the
brake pedal to see if it feels normal.
If it does, check the brake fluid level
thenexttimeyoustopataservice
station (see page ).
The brake system
indicator normally
comes on when
you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position and as a reminder to
check the parking brake. It will stay
on if you do not fully release the
parking brake.
If the fluid level is low, take your
vehicle to a dealer, and have the
brake system inspected for leaks or
worn brake pads.
Slow down by shifting to a lower
gear, and pull to the side of the road
when it is safe. Because of the long
distance needed to stop, it is
hazardous to drive the vehicle. You
should have it towed, and repaired as
soon as possible (see
on page ).
If the ABS indicator and the VSA
system indicator come on with the
brake system indicator, have your
vehicle inspected by your dealer
immediately.
246
279
Brake System Indicator
Emergency
Towing
278
U.S. Canada
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If your vehicle needs to be towed,
call a professional towing service or
organization. Never tow your vehicle
with just a rope or chain. It is very
dangerous.
Any other method of towing will
damage the drive system. When you
contact the towing agency, inform
them a flat-bed is required.
The operator will load
your vehicle on the back of a truck.
The vehicle’s fuses are located in
four fuse boxes. The interior fuse
boxes are located under the
dashboard on the driver’s and
passenger’s side.
On 4WD models
CONTINUED
Emergency Towing
The only way you can safely tow
your vehicle is with flat-bed
equipment.
Fuses
Emergency Towing, Fuses
Taking Care of the Unexpected
279
DRIVER’ S SIDE INTERIOR
Towing with only two tires on the
ground will damage parts of the 4WD
system. It should be transported on a
flat-bed truck or trailer.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If something electrical in your
vehicle stops working, the first thing
youshouldcheckforisablownfuse.
Determine from the chart on pages
and , or the diagram on the
fuse box lid, which fuse or fuses
control that device. Check those
fuses first, but check all the fuses
before deciding that a blown fuse is
the cause. Replace any blown fuses,
and check if the device works.
Turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK (0) position. Make sure the
headlights and all other
accessories are off.
Remove the cover from the fuse
box.
To open the passenger’s side fuse
box, pull the right edge of the cover.
The primary under-hood fuse box is
on the passenger’s side. To open it,
pushthetabsasshown.
1.
2.
283 284
Fuses
Checking and Replacing Fuses
280
PASSENGER’ S SIDE INTERIOR
UNDER-
HOOD
FUSE
BOX
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
Check each of the large fuses in
the primary under-hood fuse box
by looking through the top at the
wire inside. Remove the screws
with a Phillips-head screwdriver.
Look for a blown wire inside the
fuse. If it is blown, replace it with
one of the spare fuses of the same
rating or lower.
Check the smaller fuses in the
under-hood fuse box and all the
fuses in the interior fuse boxes by
pulling out each fuse with the fuse
puller.
The fuse puller is in the primary
under-hood fuse box.
3. 4. 5.
Fuses
Taking Care of the Unexpected
281
BLOWN
BLOWN
FUSE PULLER
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you cannot drive the vehicle
without fixing the problem, and you
do not have a spare fuse, take a fuse
of the same rating or a lower rating
from one of the other circuits. Make
sureyoucandowithoutthatcircuit
temporarily (such as the accessory
power socket or radio).
If you replace the blown fuse with a
spare fuse that has a lower rating, it
might blow out again. This does not
indicate anything wrong. Replace the
fuse with one of the correct rating as
soon as you can.
If the replacement fuse of the
same rating blows in a short time,
there is probably a serious
electrical problem with your
vehicle. Leave the blown fuse in
that circuit, and have your vehicle
checked by a qualified technician.
If a trailer light is burned out, check
if these fuses are blown when you
replace the light bulbs:
IfthosefusesareOK,butthetrailer
lights still do not work, there are two
blown 7.5 amp fuses in the trailer
hitch wiring. To access the 7.5 amp
fuses:
Open the tailgate and remove the
cargo floor lid.
Pull out the bottom of the tailgate
rubber seal.
Remove rear trim panel by pulling
up on the inside edge of the rear
trim panel, and unhooking the four
clips and tabs.
After replacing fuses, and reinstall
the rear trim panel in the reverse
order of removal.
Primary under-hood fuse box
fuses5,7,and24
Interior driver’s side fuse box: 10
Interior passenger’s side fuse box:
10If the driver’s power window fuse is
removed, the AUTO function of the
driver’s window will be disabled. You
should reset the AUTO feature, (see
page ).
If the radio fuse is removed, the
audio system will disable itself. The
nexttimeyouturnontheradio,you
will see ‘‘ENTER COdE’’ in the
frequency display. Use the preset
buttons to enter the five-digit code
(see page ).
6.
1.
2.
3.
4.
95
139
On EX and EX-L models
Trailer Fuses
Fuses
282
Replacing a fuse with one that has a
higher rating greatly increases the
chances of damaging the electrical
system. If you do not have a
replacement fuse with the proper rating
for the circuit, install one with a lower
rating.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
No. Amps. No. Circuits Protected
No. Circuits Protected
Amps.
Amps.
Circuits Protected
Circuits ProtectedNo. Amps.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
20 A
30 A
20 A
15 A
15 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
40 A
40 A
30 A
40 A
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Rear A/C
Heater Motor
Cooling Fan
Spare Fuse
Spare Fuse
Spare Fuse
Battery
Condenser Fan
MG Clutch
IGI Main
Trailer (accessory)
7
8
9
10
11
ETCS
IG Coil
LAF
TPMS
(FR FOG)
30 A
40 A
30 A
7.5 A
10 A
15 A
120 A
30 A
7.5 A
50 A
15 A
15 A
15 A
7.5 A
(20 A)
Spare Fuse
Spare Fuse
Right Headlight
ACG S
Hazard
Not used
Stop, Horn
Left Headlight
Radio
Power Window Motor
Power Seat
Rear Defroster
Back Up, ACC
AC INVERTER
VSA F/S Relay
VSA Motor
VTM-4
ACM
Rear Accessory Socket
1
2
3
4
5
6
20 A
40 A
30 A
20 A
10 A
15 A
Fuse Locations
Taking Care of the Unexpected
283
PRIMARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX
SECONDARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
＊
＊
＊ ＊
No. No. Amps.Amps. Circuits Protected Circuits Protected
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
20 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
10 A
20 A
20 A
15 A
15 A
10 A
20 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
20 A
20 A
15 A
10 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
10 A
15 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
10 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
30 A
Fuel Pump
SRS
Heater Control, A/C Clutch
Relay, Cooling Fan Relay
Power Mirror, ABS
Daytime Running Light
ECU(PCM),CruiseControl
OPDS, Rear Wiper
ACC Relay
Back-up Lights, Instrument
Lights
Turn Signals
VTM-4
Front Wiper
Not used
Driver’s Power Window
Driver’s Power Seat Reclining
Heated Seat
Driver’s Power Seat Sliding
Not used
Daytime Running Light
Driver’s side Rear Power
Window
Front Passenger’s Power
Window
Front Accessory Socket
Small Light
Interior Light
Power Door Lock
Back Up
Moonroof
Moonroof
Passenger’s Side Rear Power
Window
Canadian models:
Canadian models
Fuse Locations
284
Driver’s Side
INTERIOR FUSE BOX
Passenger’s Side
Front
Front
:
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Thediagramsinthissectiongive
you the dimensions and capacities of
your vehicle and the locations of the
identification numbers. It also
includes information you should
know about your vehicle’s tires and
emissions control systems.
................Identification Numbers . 286
................................Specifications . 288
..........DOT Tire Quality Grading . 290
Uniform Tire Quality
..................................Grading . 290
.................................Treadwear . 290
......................................Traction . 290
.............................Temperature . 291
.................................Tire Labeling . 291
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS)-Required
.............Federal Explanation . 293
.......................Emissions Controls . 295
.....................The Clean Air Act . 295
Crankcase Emissions Control
....................................System . 295
Evaporative Emissions Control
....................................System . 295
Onboard Refueling Vapor
................................Recovery . 295
...Exhaust Emissions Controls . 296
....................PGM-FI System . 296
Ignition Timing Control
................................System . 296
Exhaust Gas Recirculation
...................(EGR) System . 296
Three Way Catalytic
...........................Converter . 296
....................Replacement Parts . 296
..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 297
..............State Emissions Testing . 298
....Testing of Readiness Codes . 298
Technical Information
Technical Information
285
Main Menu
Your vehicle has several identifying
numbers in various places.
The vehicle identification number
(VIN) is the 17-digit number your
dealer uses to register your vehicle
for warranty purposes. It is also
necessary for licensing and insuring
your vehicle. The easiest place to
find the VIN is on a plate fastened to
the top of the dashboard. You can
seeitbylookingthroughthe
windshield on the driver’s side. It is
also on the certification label
attached to the driver’s doorjamb,
and is stamped on the engine
compartment bulkhead. The VIN is
also provided in bar code on the
certification label.
Identification Numbers
286
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
CERTIFICATION LABEL
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The transmission number is on a
label on top of the transmission.
The engine number is stamped into
the engine block. It is on the front.
Identification Numbers
Technical Information
287
ENGINE NUMBER
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−−
＊
＊
＊
＊
−
＊ ＊
＊
＊
Specifications
288
Dimensions
Weights
Air Conditioning
Battery
Capacities
1.93 US gal (7.3 )
2.43 US gal (9.2 )
4.5 US qt (4.3 )
4.2 US qt (4.0 )
5.3 US qt (5.0 )
20.34 US gal (77.0 )
188.0 in (4,775 mm)
76.5 in (1,943 mm)
ND-OIL8
24.7 26.5 oz (700 750 g)
HFC-134a (R-134a)
Length
Width
Height
Wheelbase
Track 66.3 in (1,685 mm)
106.3 in (2,700 mm)
70.5 in (1,790 mm)
Gross vehicle weight rating
Gross combined weight
rating (GCWR)
See the tire information label atta-
ched to the driver’s doorjamb.
9,700 lbs (4,400 kg)
Equipped with transmission fluid cooler and power steering
fluid cooler.
The GCWR must be reduced 2 percent for every 1,000 feet (305
meters) of elevation.
Refrigerant type
Charge quantity
Lubricant type
77.5 in (1,968 mm)
71.7 in (1,821 mm)
70.1 in (1,780 mm)
71.3 in (1,811 mm)
66.5 in (1,690 mm)
66.5 in (1,690 mm)
66.7 in (1,694 mm)
12 V 20 AH/5 HRCapacity
Excluding the oil remaining in the engine
0.193 US gal (0.73
)
Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in the
engine
Reserve tank capacity:
2.79 US qt (2.64
)
4.8 US qt (4.5
)
Fuel tank
Engine
coolant
Engine oil
Automatic
transmission
fluid
Rear
differential
fluid (4WD)
Windshield
washer
reservoir
8.3 US qt (7.9 )
3.5 US qt (3.3 )
8.9 US qt (8.4
)
4.0 US qt (3.8 )
Approx.
1:
2:
1:
2:
Front
Rear
4WD
2WD
LX
EX
LX
EX
LX
EX
Front
Rear
4WD
2WD
Change
Total
Change
Including
filter
Without
filter
Total
Change
Total
Change
4WD
2WD
4WD
2WD
2 1
1
2
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
＊
＊
＊
＊
Specifications
Technical Inf ormation
289
Lights
Fuses
Engine
Alignment
Tires
Headlights
Front side marker lights
Front position lights
Front turn signal lights
Side turn signal lights
Front fog lights
Rear side marker lights
Rear turn signal/hazard lights
Stop/Taillights
Backup lights
License plate lights
High-mount brake light
Front map lights
Rear map lights
Cargo area light
Vanity mirror light
Door (Courtesy) light 3.8 W
21 W/5 W
5W12 V
12 V
21 CP (18 W)
3CP
21 CP (18 W)
8W
4CP
5W
5W
21 W
3CP
55 W
3CP
12 V
12 V 1.1 W
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V 21 W/5 W
5W12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
12 V
Interior
Under-hood
See page 284 or the fuse label
attached to the dashboard.
See page 284 or the fuse label
attached to the inside of the fuse
box door under the dashboard.
See page 283 or the fuse box
cover.
Type
BorexStroke
Displacement
Compression ratio
Spark plugs
SKJ16DR-M11
IZFR5K-11
10.0 : 1
211.8 cu-in (3,471 cm )
3.50 x 3.66 in (89.0 x 93.0 mm)
Toe-in
Camber
Caster
0.00 in (0.0 mm)
0.00 in (0.0 mm)
0°66’
0°76’
1°98’
0°50’
1°88’
0°50’
Size
Pressure
P235/70R16 104S
T155/90D16 110M
32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm
)
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
Water cooled 4-stroke SOHC,
i-VTEC V6 gasoline engine (2WD)
Water cooled 4-stroke SOHC,
VTEC V6 gasoline engine (4WD)
12 V
12 V
55 W
60 W
Front/Rear
Spare
Front/Rear
Spare
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
Front
Driver’s side
Passenger’s side
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
Front
NGK:
DENSO:
1 : EX-L model
2 : LX and EX models
(2WD)
(2WD)
(2WD)
(4WD)
(4WD)
(4WD)
High
Low
(AMBER)
(H11)
(HB3)
(H11)
2
1
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between the tread shoulder and the
maximum section width. For
example:
All passenger vehicle tires must
conform to Federal Safety
Requirements in addition to these
grades.
The treadwear grade is a compara-
tive rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government
test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and one-
half (1 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of
tires depends upon the actual condi-
tions of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices, and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those
grades represent the tire’s ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces
of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Warning: The traction grade
assignedtothistireisbasedon
straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
The tires on your vehicle meet all
U.S. Federal Safety Requirements.
All tires are also graded for
treadwear, traction, and temperature
performance according to
Department of Transportation
(DOT) standards. The following
explains these gradings.
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Treadwear 200
Traction AA
Temperature A
Treadwear Traction AA, A, B, C
290
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−−
−
−
−
−
−
−
Warning: The temperature grade for
this tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading,
either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible
tire failure.
The tires that came on your vehicle
have a number of markings. Those
you should be aware of are described
below.
Whenever tires are replaced, they
should be replaced with tires of the
same size. Following is an example
of tire size with an explanation of
what each component means.
Speed symbol (an
alphabetical code indicating
the maximum speed rating).
Tire construction code (R
indicates radial).
Load index (a numerical code
associated with the maximum
load the tire can carry).
Rim diameter in inches.
Aspect ratio (the tire’s section
height as a percentage of its
width).
Tire width in millimeters.
Vehicletype(Pindicates
passenger vehicle).The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.
109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
P
16
R
235
70
104
S
Temperature A,B,C
Tire Labeling
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles), Tire Labeling
Tire Size
Technical Information
291
P235/70R16 104S
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
−The maximum air
pressurethetirecan
hold.
The maximum load the
tire can carry at
maximum air pressure.
Max Load
The tire identification number (TIN)
is a group of numbers and letters
that look like the following example
TIN. TIN is located on the sidewall
of the tire.
Tire type code.
Manufacturer’s
identification mark.
This indicates that the tire
meets all requirements of
the U.S. Department of
Transportation.
Date of manufacture.
DOT
B97R
FW6X
2202
Max Press
Tire Identification Number
Maximum Tire Load
Maximum Tire Pressure
Tire Labeling
292
DOT B97R FW6X 2202
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
Each tire, including the spare (if
provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a
different size than the size indicated
on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to
the proper pressure.
Driving on a significantly under-
inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
As an added safety feature, your
vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale
and/or
when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated.
CONTINUED
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal Explanation
Technical Information
293
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or
alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function
properly.
Your vehicle has also been equipped
with a TPMS malfunction indicator
to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is provided by
a separate telltale, which displays the
symbol ‘‘TPMS’’ when illuminated.
When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated,
the system may not be able to detect
or signal low tire pressure as
intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a
variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Required Federal Explanation
294
Main Menu
Table of Contents
＊
＊
In Canada, Honda vehicles comply
with the Canadian emission
requirements, as specified in an
agreement with Environment
Canada, at the time they are
manufactured.
Your vehicle has a positive
crankcase ventilation system. This
keeps gasses that build up in the
engine’s crankcase from going into
the atmosphere. The positive
crankcase ventilation valve routes
them from the crankcase back to the
intake manifold. They are then
drawn into the engine and burned.
As gasoline evaporates in the fuel
tank, an evaporative emissions
control canister filled with charcoal
adsorbs the vapor. It is stored in this
canister while the engine is off. After
the engine is started and warmed up,
the vapor is drawn into the engine
and burned during driving.
The onboard refueling vapor
recovery (ORVR) system captures
the fuel vapors during refueling. The
vapors are adsorbed in a canister
filled with activated carbon. While
driving, the fuel vapors are drawn
into the engine and burned off.
The burning of gasoline in your
vehicle’s engine produces several by-
products. Some of these are carbon
monoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen
(NOx), and hydrocarbons (HC).
Gasoline evaporating from the tank
also produces hydrocarbons. Con-
trolling the production of NOx, CO,
and HC is important to the environ-
ment. Under certain conditions of
sunlight and climate, NOx and HC
react to form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’
Carbon monoxide does not contri-
bute to smog creation, but it is a
poisonous gas.
The United States Clean Air Act
sets standards for automobile
emissions. It also requires that
automobile manufacturers explain to
owners how their emissions controls
workandwhattodotomaintain
them. This section summarizes how
the emissions controls work.
Scheduled maintenance is on page
.
234
Crankcase Emissions Control
System
Evaporative Emissions Control
System
Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery
The Clean Air Act
Emissions Controls
Technical Information
295
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The exhaust emissions controls
include four systems: PGM-FI,
ignition timing control, exhaust gas
recirculation, and three way catalytic
converter. These four systems work
together to control the engine’s
combustion and minimize the
amount of HC, CO, and NOx that
come out the tailpipe. The exhaust
emissions control systems are
separate from the crankcase and
evaporative emissions control
systems.
The PGM-FI system uses sequential
multiport fuel injection.
It has three subsystems: air intake,
engine control, and fuel control. The
powertrain control module (PCM)
uses various sensors to determine
how much air is going into the
engine. It then controls how much
fuel to inject under all operating
conditions.
The emissions control systems are
designed and certified to work to-
gether in reducing emissions to
levels that comply with the Clean Air
Act. To make sure the emissions
remain low, you should use only new
Honda replacement parts or their
equivalent for repairs. Using lower
qualitypartsmayincreasethe
emissions from your vehicle.
The emissions control systems are
covered by warranties separate from
the rest of your vehicle. Read your
warranty manual for more informa-
tion.The three way catalytic converter is
in the exhaust system. Through
chemical reactions, it converts HC,
CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaust
to carbon dioxide (CO ), nitrogen
(N ), and water vapor.
This system constantly adjusts the
ignition timing, reducing the amount
of HC, CO, and NOx produced.
The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR)
system takes some of the exhaust
gas and routes it back into the intake
manifold. Adding exhaust gas to the
air/fuel mixture reduces the amount
of NOx produced when the fuel is
burned.
2
2
Exhaust Emissions Controls Replacement Parts
PGM-FI System Three Way Catalytic Converter
Ignition Timing Control System
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)
System
Emissions Controls
296
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The three way catalytic converter
contains precious metals that serve
as catalysts, promoting chemical
reactions to convert the exhaust
gasses without affecting the metals.
The catalytic converter is referred to
as a three-way catalyst, since it acts
on HC, CO, and NOx. A replacement
unit must be an original Honda part
or its equivalent.
The three way catalytic converter
must operate at a high temperature
for the chemical reactions to take
place. It can set on fire any
combustible materials that come
near it. Park your vehicle away from
high grass, dry leaves, or other
flammables.
A defective three way catalytic
converter contributes to air pollution,
and can impair your engine’s per-
formance. Follow these guidelines to
protect your vehicle’s three way
catalytic converter.
Always use unleaded gasoline.
Even a small amount of leaded
gasoline can contaminate the
catalyst metals, making the three
way catalytic converter ineffective.
Keep the engine well maintained.
Have your vehicle diagnosed and
repaired if it is misfiring, back-
firing, stalling, or otherwise not
running properly.
Three Way Catalytic Converter
Technical Information
297
THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER
THREE WAY CATALYTIC
CONVERTERS
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you take your vehicle for a state
emissions test shortly after the
battery has been disconnected or
gone dead, it may not pass the test.
This is because of certain ‘‘readiness
codes’’ that must be set in the on-
board diagnostics for the emissions
systems. These codes are erased
when the battery is disconnected,
and set again only after several days
of driving under a variety of
conditions.
If the testing facility determines that
the readiness codes are not set, you
will be requested to return at a later
date to complete the test. If you must
get the vehicle retested within the
next two or three days, you can
condition the vehicle for retesting by
doing the following.
Make sure the gas tank is nearly,
but not completely, full (around
3/4).
Without touching the accelerator
pedal, start the engine, and let it
idle for 20 seconds.
Keep the vehicle in Park. Increase
the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and
hold it there until the temperature
gauge rises to at least 1/4 of the
scale (about 3 minutes).
Select a nearby lightly traveled
major highway where you can
maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph
(80to97km/h)foratleast20
minutes. Drive on the highway in
D. Do not use the cruise control.
When traffic allows, drive for 90
seconds without moving the
accelerator pedal. (Vehicle speed
may vary slightly; this is okay.) If
you cannot do this for a
continuous 90 seconds because of
traffic conditions, drive for at least
30 seconds, then repeat it two
more times (for a total of 90
seconds).
Make sure the vehicle has been
parked with the engine off for 6
hours or more.
Make sure the ambient
temperature is between 40° and
95°F.
Testing of Readiness Codes
State Emissions Testing
298
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Then drive in city/suburban
traffic for at least 10 minutes.
When traffic conditions allow, let
the vehicle coast for several
seconds without using the
accelerator pedal or the brake
pedal.
If the testing facility determines
the readiness codes are still not
set, see your dealer.
State Emissions Testing
Technical Information
299
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Main Menu
U.S. Owners:Honda dealership personnel are
trained professionals. They should
be able to answer all your questions.
If you encounter a problem that your
dealership does not solve to your
satisfaction, please discuss it with
the dealership’s management. The
service manager or general manager
can help. Almost all problems are
solved in this way.
If you are dissatisfied with the
decision made by the dealership’s
management, contact your Honda
Customer Service Office.
Canadian Owners:
In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin
Islands:
When you call or write, please give
us this information:
Vehicle Identification Number
(see page )
Name and address of the dealer
who services your vehicle
Date of purchase
Mileage on your vehicle
Your name, address, and tele-
phone number
A detailed description of the
problem
Name of the dealer who sold the
vehicle to you
286
Customer Service Information
302
CUSTOMER RELATIONS
RELATIONS AVEC LA CLIENTÉLE
Honda Canada Inc.
715 Milner Avenue
Toronto, ON
M1B 2K8
Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9
Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909
Toronto (416) 287-4776
American Honda Motor Co.
Honda Customer Service
Mail Stop 500-2N-7D
1919 Torrance Boulevard
Torrance, California 90501-2746
Tel: (800) 999-1009
Bella International
P.O. Box 190816
San Juan, PR 00919-0816
Tel: (787) 620-7028
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
Your new vehicle is covered by these
warranties:
covers your new vehicle, except for
the battery, emissions control
systems, and accessories, against
defects in materials and
workmanship.
these two
warranties cover your vehicle’s
emissions control systems. Time,
mileage, and coverage are
conditional. Please read your
warranty booklet for exact
information.
provides prorated
coverage for a replacement battery
purchased from your dealer.
provides
coverageforaslongasthepur-
chaser of the muffler owns the
vehicle.
this warranty gives up
to 100 % credit toward a replacement
battery.
a seat
belt that fails to function properly is
covered by a limited warranty.
Please read your warranty booklet
for details.
all exterior body panels are
covered for rust-through from the
inside for the specified time period
with no mileage limit.
Honda accessories are covered
under this warranty. Time and
mileage limits depend on the type of
accessory and other factors. Please
read your warranty booklet for
details.
covers all genuine
Honda replacement parts against
defects in materials and
workmanship.
Restrictions and exclusions apply to
all these warranties. Please read the
2007 Honda warranty information
booklet that came with your vehicle
for precise information on warranty
coverages. Your vehicle’s original
tires are covered by their
manufacturer. Tire warranty
information is in a separate booklet.
Please refer to the 2007 warranty
manual that came with your vehicle.
U.S. Owners
Canadian Owners
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
Emissions Control Systems Defects
Warranty and Emissions
Performance Warranty
Replacement Battery Limited
Warranty
Replacement Muffler Lifetime
Limited Warranty
Original Equipment Battery Limited
Warranty
Seat Belt Limited Warranty
Rust Perforation Limited Warranty
Accessory Limited Warranty
Replacement Parts Limited
Warranty
Warranty Coverages
Warranty and Customer Relations
303
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition
to notifying American Honda Motor
Co., Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar com-
plaints, it may open an investigation,
and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may
order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become
involved in individual problems
between you, your dealer, or
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
VehicleSafetyHotlinetoll-freeat
1-888-327-4236 (TTY:1-800-424-9153);
go to http://www.safercar.gov
; or write
to: Administrator,
NHTSA, 400 Seventh
Street, SW., Washington, DC 20590.
You can also obtain other information
about motor vehicle safety from http://
www.
safercar.gov.
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)
304
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
＊
＊
＊
＊
２
０
０
７
Ｈ
Ｏ
Ｎ
The publications shown below can be purchased from Helm
Incorporated. You can order in any of three ways:
Detach and mail the order form on the right half of this page
Call Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356
Go online at
If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc.
at 1-800-782-4356.
(credit card orders only)
Valid only for sales within the United States. Canadian
owners should contact their authorized Honda dealer.
Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals
(U.S.only)
Authorized Manuals
Authorized Manuals
305
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-782-4356
OR
(NOTE: For Credit Card Holder Orders Only)
MINIMUM CREDIT CARD PURCHASE $10.00
Price
Each
$75.00
$50.00
$44.00
$34.00
$29.00
$12.00
$12.00
FREE
Publication
Form Number
61S9V04
61S9V04EL
61S9V30
31S9V641
31S9V800
31S9VM20
31S9VQ41
HON-R
Form Description
2006-2007 Honda Pilot Service Manual
2003-2007 Honda Pilot
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual
2003 Model Series Honda Pilot
Body Repair Manual
2007 Honda Pilot Owner’s Manual
2007 Honda Pilot
Navigation System Owner’s Manual
2007 Honda Pilot
Honda Service History
2007 Honda Pilot
Quick Start Guide
Order Form for Previous Years-
Indicate Year and Model Desired
PUBLICATION NUMBER
VEHICLE MODEL
Name Year
Qty
Price
Each
Total
Price
GRAND TOTAL
HANDLING CHARGE
Mich. Purchases
Add 6% Sales Tax
TOTAL MATERIAL
$6.95
Monday-Friday 8:00 A.M. 6:00 P.M. EST
By completing this form you can order the materials desired. You can
pay by check or money order, or charge to your credit card. Mail to
Helm Incorporated at the address shown on the back of the order form.
Prices are subject to change without
notice and without incurring obligation.
Orders are mailed within 10 days. Please
allow adequate time for delivery.
Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring obligation.
www. helminc. com
Main Menu
Table of Contents
−
−
−
Ｓ
Ｈ
Ｉ
Ｐ
Ｔ
Ｏ
Ｐ
Ａ
Ｙ
Ｍ
Ｅ
Ｎ
Ｔ
This manual covers maintenance and recommended
procedures for repair to engine and chassis components.
It is written for the journeyman mechanic, but is simple
enough for most mechanically-inclined owners to under-
stand.
This manual complements the service manual by
providing in-depth troubleshooting information for each
electrical circuit in your vehicle.
This manual describes the procedures involved in the
replacement of damaged body parts.
Body Repair Manual:
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:
Service Manual:
Authorized Manuals
306
NOTE: Dealers and companies, please provide dealer or company name,
and the name of the person to whose attention the shipment should be
sent. For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the address shown
below for a quotation.
P.O. BOX 07280·DETROIT, MICHIGAN 48207·1-800-782-4356
Customer Name
Attention
Apartment Number
State & Zip Code
City
Daytime Telephone Number
Check or money order enclosed payable to Helm Inc U.S. funds only.
Do not send cash
Master
Card
VISA Check here if your billing address is different
from the shipping address shown above.
Account Number
Expiration: Mo. Yr.
CUSTOMER SIGNATURE
DATE
Street Address No P.O. Box Number
()
These publications cannot be returned for credit without receiving advance authorization within 14
days of delivery. On returns, a restocking fee may be applied against the original order.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
CONTINUED
...Accessories and Modifications . 191
ACCESSORY (Ignition Key
.......................................Position) . 81
............Accessory Power Sockets . 101
...........................AC Power Outlet . 102
....................Additives, Engine Oil . 239
...............AdvancedAirbagSystem .30
.............................Airbag (SRS) . 11, 25
..........Airbag System Components . 25
..............Air Conditioning System . 106
.....................Rear A/C Control . 113
.......................Air Pressure, Tires . 258
......................................Antifreeze . 242
...............Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) . 209
...............................Indicator . 63, 210
...................................Operation . 209
..............Anti-theft, Audio System . 139
.Anti-theft Steering Column Lock . 81
................................Audio System . 115
...Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners . 23
...Automatic Lighting Off Feature . 76
.............Automatic Speed Control . 175
..............Automatic Transmission . 200
..........................Capacity, Fluid . 288
...............Checking Fluid Level . 244
.......................................Shifting . 200
.Shift Lever Position Indicator . 200
................Shift Lever Positions . 201
....................Shift Lock Release . 203
Battery
Charging System
...........................Indicator . 62, 276
............................Jump Starting . 272
..............................Maintenance . 262
............................Specifications . 289
..............................Before Driving . 185
..................................Belts, Seat . 10, 21
...........................Beverage Holders . 99
..................................Booster Seats . 54
Brakes
...........Anti-lock System (ABS) . 209
.............Break-in, New Linings . 186
....................Bulb Replacement . 252
...........................................Fluid . 246
.........................................Parking . 97
.................System Indicator . 63, 278
........................Wear Indicators . 209
.............................Braking System . 208
.................Break-in, New Vehicle . 186
..Brightness Control, Instruments . 76
........................Brights, Headlights . 75
Bulb Replacement
..........................Back-up Lights . 252
.....................Brake Lights . 252, 253
................Front Parking Lights . 249
........Front Side Marker Lights . 249
.................................Headlights . 248
........High-mount Brake Lights . 253
.................................Rear Bulbs . 252
............................Specifications . 289
.............Turn Signal Light . 249, 252
..............................Bulbs, Halogen . 248
............................Capacities Chart . 288
.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 57
.............................Carrying Cargo . 193
.............CAUTION, Explanation of . iii
..........................CD Changer . 131, 134
.......................................CD Player . 130
Index
A
B
C
INDEX
I
Main Menu
........................Certification Label . 286
............................................Chains . 261
....................Changing a Flat Tire . 267
Change Oil
........................................How to . 240
......................................When to . 229
...Charging System Indicator . 62, 276
............Checklist, Before Driving . 198
..................Childproof Door Locks . 83
Child Seats
.........................................LATCH . 47
..........Tether Anchorage Points . 51
...............Climate Control System . 112
.........................Clock, Setting the . 140
.....................Code, Audio System . 139
........................CO in the Exhaust . 295
............Cold Weather, Starting in . 199
......................Compact Spare Tire . 266
...................Console Compartment . 99
.................Consumer Information . 302
.............Controls, Instruments and . 59
Coolant
........................................Adding . 242
....................................Checking . 190
.........................Proper Solution . 242
...................Temperature Gauge . 71
...................Conversation Mirror . 100
Crankcase Emissions Control
........................................System . 295
............Cruise Control Operation . 175
....Customer Service Information . 302
..............................Economy, Fuel . 190
............Emergencies on the Road . 265
.............Battery, Jump Starting . 272
...........Brake System Indicator . 278
................Changing a Flat Tire . 267
.....Charging System Indicator . 276
..................Checking the Fuses . 279
.....Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 276
...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 277
..................Overheated Engine . 274
...........................Emergency Brake . 97
......................Emergency Flashers . 77
......................Emergency Towing . 279
.......................Emissions Controls . 295
.............Emissions Testing, State . 298
...............DANGER, Explanation of . iii
...................................Dashboard . 4, 60
................Daytime Running Lights . 76
Daytime Running Lights
.......................................Indicator . 67
.................................Dead Battery . 272
............Defects, Reporting Safety . 304
................Defogger, Rear Window . 77
......Defrosting the Windows . 108, 110
....................................Dimensions . 288
...............Dimming the Headlights . 75
Dipstick
..........Automatic Transmission . 244
..................................Engine Oil . 189
....................Directional Signals . 66, 75
........Disc Brake Wear Indicators . 209
.....................Disposal of Used Oil . 241
Doors
..............Locking and Unlocking . 82
..........DOT Tire Quality Grading . 290
...........Driver and Passenger Safety . 7
...........................................Driving . 197
....................................Economy . 190
...................................DVD Player . 142
........DVD Player Error Message . 171
Index
D
E
II
Main Menu
CONTINUED
...............Gas Mileage, Improving . 190
.........................................Gasoline . 186
...............Fuel Reserve Indicator . 67
...........................................Gauge . 70
................Octane Requirement . 186
........................Tank, Filling the . 187
................Gas Station Procedures . 187
Gauges
...Engine Coolant Temperature . 71
...............................................Fuel . 70
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight
.......................................Rating) . 214
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight
.......................................Rating) . 214
............Gearshift Lever Positions . 200
........................................Glove Box . 99
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
.......................................Rating) . 214
.............Halogen Headlight Bulbs . 248
.................Hazard Warning Button . 77
Engine
....Coolant Temperature Gauge . 71
Malfunction Indicator
................................Lamp . 62, 277
........Oil Pressure Indicator . 62, 276
..............Oil, What Kind to Use . 239
...............................Overheating . 274
............................Specifications . 289
............................Speed Limiter . 202
.......................................Starting . 199
.Evaporative Emissions Controls . 295
...............................Exhaust Fumes . 57
Exhaust Gas Recirculation
........................................System . 296
Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat
........................................Belts by . 19
...................................Fan, Interior . 106
.........................................Features . 105
....................Filling the Fuel Tank . 187
Filters
...............................................Oil . 240
.............Flashers, Hazard Warning . 77
...................Flat Tire, Changing a . 267
Fluids
..........Automatic Transmission . 244
..........................................Brake . 246
..........................Power Steering . 247
................Windshield Washers . 243
...................Folding the Third Seat . 90
..........................Four-way Flashers . 77
.................................................Fuel . 186
...............................Cap Message . 72
......................Fill Door and Cap . 187
...........................................Gauge . 70
................Octane Requirement . 186
........................Reserve Indicator . 67
........................Tank, Filling the . 187
.....................Fuses, Checking the . 279
Index
F
G
H
INDEX
III
Main Menu
.................Jacking up the Vehicle . 268
.......................................Jack, Tire . 267
................................Jump Starting . 272
..................................................Keys . 79
........................................Headlights . 75
........................................Aiming . 248
..............Automatic Lighting Off . 76
............Daytime Running Lights . 76
..................High Beam Indicator . 67
...........High Beams, Turning on . 75
............Low Beams, Turning on . 75
.........................Reminder Chime . 76
........Replacing Halogen Bulbs . 248
...................................Turning on . 75
...................................Headphones . 172
..............................Head Restraints . 91
.................................Heated Mirror . 93
.....................................Heater, Seat . 86
.....................Heating and Cooling . 106
.............High Altitude, Starting at . 199
.................High-Low Beam Switch . 75
..............High-mount Brake Light . 253
HomeLink Universal
................................Transceiver . 181
.......................Hood, Opening the . 188
...Identification Number, Vehicle . 286
Ignition
..............................................Keys . 79
...........................................Switch . 81
............Timing Control System . 296
........................Immobilizer System . 79
...Important Handling Information . iv
.........Important Safety Precautions . 8
.........Indicators, Instrument Panel . 61
...............................Infant Restraint . 43
......................................Infant Seats . 43
...................Inflation, Proper Tire . 257
...................................Inside Mirror . 92
.............................Inspection, Tire . 259
Installing a Child Seat
.........................................LATCH . 47
..........Tether Anchorage Points . 51
............................Instrument Panel . 61
........Instrument Panel Brightness . 76
........................................Introduction . i
.......................Label, Certification . 286
.................Lane Change, Signaling . 75
........................Lap/Shoulder Belts . 22
...........LATCH Anchorage System . 47
.......................................Lights . 75, 102
....................Bulb Replacement . 248
.......................................Indicator . 61
.........................................Parking . 75
..................................Turn Signal . 75
....................................Load Limits . 194
......LOCK (Ignition Key Position) . 81
Locks
.......Anti-theft Steering Column . 81
............................Fuel Fill Door . 187
....................................Glove Box . 99
....................Lockout Prevention . 82
.................................Power Door . 82
........................Low Coolant Level . 190
.........................Low Fuel Indicator . 67
...Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 62, 276
Index
I
J
K
L
IV
Main Menu
CONTINUED
..................................Maintenance . 227
Owner’s Maintenance
...................................Checks . 234
.................................Record . 236-237
................................Minder . 229-235
.........................Minder Indicator . 69
..........................................Safety . 228
.Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 62, 277
..............Manual Seat Adjustments . 88
...............................Meters, Gauges . 70
.................................Modifications . 192
.........................................Moonroof . 96
.................................Lower Anchor . 47
...Lubricant Specifications Chart . 288
.........................................Luggage . 193
...................Neutral Gear Position . 201
..................New Vehicle Break-in . 186
...................NOTICE, Explanation of . i
...............Numbers, Identification . 286
...Octane Requirement, Gasoline . 186
.........................................Odometer . 70
...............................Odometer, Trip . 70
....................Off-Highway Driving . 222
...................Off-Road Precautions . 222
Oil
........................Change, How to . 240
......................Change, When to . 229
......................Checking Engine . 189
..............Pressure Indicator . 62, 276
Selecting Proper Viscosity
......................................Chart . 239
...........ON (Ignition Key Position) . 81
Onboard Refueling Vapor
....................................Recovery . 295
..............................Outside Mirrors . 93
....................Overheating, Engine . 274
....Owner’s Maintenance Checks . 234
..............Panel Brightness Control . 76
........................Park Gear Position . 201
...........................................Parking . 207
.................................Parking Brake . 97
Parking Brake and Brake System
...............................Indicator . 63, 278
.................................Parking Lights . 75
..Parking Over Things that Burn . 297
..........................Playing the Radio . 117
................................Playing a Disc . 130
....Playing the Disc Changer . 131, 134
.............................PGM-FI System . 296
................Power Seat Adjustments . 87
.................Power Socket Locations . 98
..............................Power Windows . 94
.........Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . 19
.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 12
...Additional Safety Precautions . 20
.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 19
........................Protecting Children . 38
...........................Protecting Infants . 43
...........Protecting Larger Children . 53
.............Protecting Small Children . 44
Index
INDEX
P
M
N
O
V
Main Menu
...................Radiator Overheating . 274
.............Radio/CD Sound System . 115
...........................Readiness Codes . 298
...............................Rear A/C Unit . 113
............Rear Audio Control Panel . 147
........Rear Entertainment System . 142
..Rear Lights, Bulb Replacement . 252
.Rear View Camera and Monitor . 180
............................Rear View Mirror . 92
.................Rear Window Defogger . 77
.Rear Window Wiper and Washer . 74
..........Reclining the Seat Backs . 87-91
.............................Reminder Lights . 61
................Remote Audio Controls . 138
.................Remote Control (RES) . 169
.......................Remote Transmitter . 83
Replacement Information
................Engine Oil and Filter . 240
.................................Floor Mats . 254
..........................................Fuses . 279
................................Light Bulbs . 248
........................................Minder . 235
................................Timing Belt . 245
...........................................Tires . 259
.............................Wiper Blades . 255
Replacing Seat Belts After a
............................................Crash . 23
...Reserve Tank, Engine Coolant . 190
...............................Restraint, Child . 38
..................Reverse Gear Position . 201
................................Rotation, Tire . 260
......................................Safety Belts . 10
............Safety Defects, Reporting . 304
.................................Safety Features . 9
.........................................Airbags . 11
.....................................Seat Belts . 10
.............Safety Labels, Location of . 58
..............................Safety Messages . iii
.........................................Seat Belts . 10
...............Additional Information . 21
Automatic Seat Belt
...............................Tensioners . 23
.....................................Cleaning . 254
......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 22
................................Maintenance . 23
Reminder Light and
................................Beeper . 21, 62
...................System Components . 25
...............Use During Pregnancy . 19
...Wearing a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 15
....................................Seat Heaters . 86
.................................................Seats . 87
............Folding the Second Seat . 89
...............Folding the Third Seat . 90
..........................Head Restraints . 91
.........Reclining the Second Seat . 89
............Reclining the Third Seat . 90
.......................Third Seat Access . 90
...................Seats, Adjusting the . 87-91
............................Security System . 174
...............................Serial Number . 286
...........................Service Intervals . 229
.............................Service Manual . 305
.........Service Station Procedures . 187
..........................Setting the Clock . 140
Shifting the Automatic
.............................Transmission . 200
.....Shift Lever Position Indicator . 200
........................Shift Lock Release . 203
Side Marker Lights, Bulb
.........................Replacement in . 249
..............................Side Airbags . 11, 31
..........................Off Indicator . 34, 63
Index
R
S
VI
Main Menu
CONTINUED
...............................Signaling Turns . 75
.....................................Snow Tires . 261
................................Sound System . 115
Spare Tire
......................................Inflating . 266
............................Specifications . 289
....................Specifications Charts . 288
................................Speed Control . 175
..........SRS, Additional Information . 25
...Additional Safety Precautions . 37
.............................Airbag Service . 36
How the Side Airbag Off
........................Indicator Work . 34
..How the SRS Indicator Works . 33
How Your Front Airbags
.........................................Work . 28
...How Your Side Airbags Work . 31
........................SRS Components . 25
.............................SRS Indicator . 33, 63
....START (Ignition Key Position) . 81
.......................Starting the Engine . 199
In Cold Weather at High
..................................Altitude . 199
................With a Dead Battery . 272
..............State Emissions Testing . 298
........Steam Coming from Engine . 274
Steering Wheel
..................................Adjustment . 78
.............Anti-theft Column Lock . 81
...............................Buttons . 138, 175
...................Stereo Sound System . 115
....................Storing Your Vehicle . 263
........................Sunglasses Holder . 100
........................................Sun Visor . 101
Supplemental Restraint System
......................................Servicing . 36
.........................SRS Indicator . 33, 63
...................System Components . 25
..................................Synthetic Oil . 240
......Taillights, Changing Bulbs in . 252
.Taking Care of the Unexpected . 265
Technical Descriptions
......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 290
.....Emissions Control Systems . 295
..........State Emissions Testing . 298
Three Way Catalytic
...............................Converter . 297
.......................Temperature Gauge . 71
........Temperature, Inside Sensor . 114
....................Temperature, Outside . 71
...................Tensioners, Seat Belts . 23
........Testing of Readiness Codes . 298
..............Tether Anchorage Points . 51
............................Theft Protection . 139
..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 297
..........................Time, Setting the . 140
..................Tilt the Steering Wheel . 78
....................................Timing Belt . 245
....................................Tire Chains . 261
.........Tire, How to Change a Flat . 267
Tire Pressure Monitoring
........................System (TPMS) . 205
Index
INDEX
T
VII
Main Menu
............WARNING, Explanation of . iii
.........Warning Labels, Location of . 58
....................Warranty Coverages . 303
Washer, Windshield
........Checking the Fluid Level . 243
............................Level Indicator . 67
.....................................Operation . 74
Wheels
...............Adjusting the Steering . 78
............Alignment and Balance . 259
..........................Compact Spare . 266
...............................Nut Wrench . 269
Windows
..................Operating the Power . 94
...........................Rear, Defogger . 77
Windshield
...........................Defroster . 108, 110
.......................................Washers . 74
Wipers, Windshield
.......................Changing Blades . 255
.....................................Operation . 74
Rear Window Wiper and
.....................................Washer . 74
..................Wireless Headphones . 172
Unexpected, Taking Care
..........................................of the . 265
....Uniform Tire Quality Grading . 290
........................Unleaded Gasoline . 186
.......Used Oil, How to Dispose of . 241
................................Vanity Mirror . 101
.................Vehicle Capacity Load . 194
......................Vehicle Dimensions . 288
....Vehicle Identification Number . 286
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)
....................................System . 211
.........................VSA Off Switch . 212
.............................Vehicle Storage . 263
.................................................VIN . 286
..................................Viscosity, Oil . 239
..................................VTM-4 Lock . 204
...............................................Tires . 257
..............................Air Pressure . 258
.........................Checking Wear . 259
..........................Compact Spare . 266
......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 290
......................................Inflation . 257
..................................Inspection . 259
..............................Maintenance . 259
...................................Replacing . 260
......................................Rotating . 260
...........................................Snow . 261
............................Specifications . 289
...................Tools, Tire Changing . 267
Towing
.....................................A Trailer . 213
................Emergency Wrecker . 279
....Equipment and Accessories . 219
.......................Traction Devices . 261
.............................Weight Limit . 215
......................Trailer Driving Tips . 219
Transmission
...............Checking Fluid Level . 244
...........................Fluid Selection . 244
..............Identification Number . 286
.............Shifting the Automatic . 200
.....................................Treadwear . 290
.......................................Trip Meter . 70
....................................Turn Signals . 75
Index
U
V
W
VIII
Main Menu
Service Information Summary
Gasoline:
Fuel Tank Capacity:
Recommended Engine Oil:
Power Steering Fluid:
Rear Differential Fluid:
Brake Fluid:
Tire Pressure (measured cold):
Automatic Transmission Fluid:
32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm
)
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm
)
Honda Power Steering Fluid
preferred, or another brand of
power steering fluid as a
temporary replacement. Do not
use ATF (see page ).
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
DOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 or
DOT 4 brake fluid as a temporary
replacement (see page ).
Compact Spare Tire:
Front/Rear:
Honda VTM-4 Differential Fluid
(see page ).
API Premium grade 5W-20
detergent oil (see page ).
Oil change capacity (including
filter):
4.5 US qt (4.3
)
Honda ATF-Z1 (Automatic
Transmission Fluid) preferred, or
aDEXRON
III ATF as a
temporary replacement (see page
).
Unleaded gasoline, pump octane
number of 87 or higher.
239
247
246
245
245
20.34 US gal (77.0 )
Main Menu
